A42MX24-1PLG84 [MICROSEMI]

Field Programmable Gate Array, 1890 CLBs, 36000 Gates, 96.6MHz, CMOS, PQCC84, ROHS COMPLIANT, PLASTIC, LCC-84;
A42MX24-1PLG84
型号: A42MX24-1PLG84
厂家: Microsemi    Microsemi
描述:

Field Programmable Gate Array, 1890 CLBs, 36000 Gates, 96.6MHz, CMOS, PQCC84, ROHS COMPLIANT, PLASTIC, LCC-84

时钟 栅 可编程逻辑
文件: 总143页 (文件大小:7579K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
HiRel Features  
Features  
High Capacity  
Commercial, Industrial, Automotive, and Military  
Temperature Plastic Packages  
Single-Chip ASIC Alternative  
Commercial, Military Temperature, and MIL-STD-883  
Ceramic Packages  
3,000 to 54,000 System Gates  
Up to 2.5 kbits Configurable Dual-Port SRAM  
Fast Wide-Decode Circuitry  
QML Certification  
Ceramic Devices Available to DSCC SMD  
Up to 202 User-Programmable I/O Pins  
Ease of Integration  
Mixed-Voltage Operation (5.0 V or 3.3 V for core and  
I/Os), with PCI-Compliant I/Os  
High Performance  
5.6 ns Clock-to-Out  
Up to 100% Resource Utilization and 100% Pin Locking  
Deterministic, User-Controllable Timing  
250 MHz Performance  
5 ns Dual-Port SRAM Access  
100 MHz FIFOs  
Unique In-System Diagnostic and Verification Capability  
with Silicon Explorer II  
7.5 ns 35-Bit Address Decode  
Low Power Consumption  
IEEE Standard 1149.1 (JTAG) Boundary Scan Testing  
Product Profile  
Device  
A40MX02  
A40MX04  
A42MX09  
A42MX16  
A42MX24  
A42MX36  
Capacity  
System Gates  
SRAM Bits  
3,000  
6,000  
14,000  
24,000  
36,000  
54,000  
2,560  
Logic Modules  
Sequential  
Combinatorial  
Decode  
295  
547  
348  
336  
624  
608  
954  
912  
24  
1,230  
1,184  
24  
Clock-to-Out  
9.5 ns  
9.5 ns  
5.6 ns  
6.1 ns  
6.1 ns  
6.3 ns  
SRAM Modules  
(64x4 or 32x8)  
348  
516  
2
624  
928  
2
954  
1,410  
2
10  
1,230  
1,822  
6
Dedicated Flip-Flops  
Maximum Flip-Flops  
Clocks  
147  
1
273  
1
User I/O (maximum)  
PCI  
57  
69  
104  
140  
176  
Yes  
Yes  
202  
Yes  
Yes  
Boundary Scan Test (BST)  
Packages (by pin count)  
PLCC  
PQFP  
VQFP  
TQFP  
CQFP  
PBGA  
44, 68  
44, 68, 84  
84  
100, 160  
100  
176  
84  
84  
160, 208  
208, 240  
100  
80  
100  
80  
100, 160, 208  
100  
176  
176  
208, 256  
272  
March 2014  
i
© 2014 Microsemi Corporation  
 
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Ordering Information  
_
PQ  
G
100  
1
A42MX16  
ES  
Application (Temperature Range)  
Blank = Commercial (0 to +70°C)  
I = Industrial (–40 to +85°C)  
M = Military (–55 to +125°C)  
B = MIL-STD-883  
A = Automotive (–40 to +125°C)  
Package Lead Count  
Lead-Free Packaging  
Blank = Standard Packaging  
G = RoHS Compliant Packaging  
Package Type  
PL = Plastic Leaded Chip Carrier  
PQ = Plastic Quad Flat Pack  
TQ = Thin (1.4 mm) Quad Flat Pack  
VQ = Very Thin (1.0 mm) Quad Flat Pack  
BG = Plastic Ball Grid Array  
CQ =Ceramic Quad Flat Pack  
Speed Grade  
Blank = Standard Speed  
–1 = Approximately 15% Faster than Standard  
–2 = Approximately 25% Faster than Standard  
–3 = Approximately 35% Faster than Standard  
–F = Approximately 40% Slower than Standard  
Part Number  
A40MX02 = 3,000 System Gates  
A40MX04 = 6,000 System Gates  
A42MX09 = 14,000 System Gates  
A42MX16 = 24,000 System Gates  
A42MX24 = 36,000 System Gates  
A42MX36 = 54,000 System Gates  
Plastic Device Resources  
User I/Os  
PQFP  
PLCC  
PLCC  
PLCC  
PQFP  
PQFP  
PQFP  
VQFP  
VQFP  
TQFP  
PBGA  
Device  
44-Pin  
68-Pin  
84-Pin 100-Pin 160-Pin 208-Pin 240-Pin 80-Pin 100-Pin 176-Pin 272-Pin  
A40MX02  
A40MX04  
A42MX09  
A42MX16  
A42MX24  
A42MX36  
34  
34  
57  
57  
57  
69  
83  
83  
57  
69  
69  
72  
72  
72  
101  
125  
125  
83  
83  
104  
140  
150  
140  
176  
176  
202  
202  
Note: Package Definitions  
PLCC = Plastic Leaded Chip Carrier, PQFP = Plastic Quad Flat Pack, TQFP = Thin Quad Flat Pack, VQFP = Very Thin Quad  
Flat Pack, PBGA = Plastic Ball Grid Array  
ii  
Revision 12  
 
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Ceramic Device Resources  
User I/Os  
Device  
CQFP 208-Pin  
CQFP 256-Pin  
A42MX36  
176  
202  
Note: Package Definitions CQFP = Ceramic Quad Flat Pack  
Temperature Grade Offerings  
Package  
PLCC 44  
PLCC 68  
PLCC 84  
PQFP 100  
PQFP 160  
PQFP 208  
PQFP 240  
VQFP 80  
VQFP 100  
TQFP 176  
PBGA 272  
CQFP 208  
CQFP 256  
Note:  
A40MX02  
C, I, M  
A40MX04  
C, I, M  
A42MX09  
A42MX16  
A42MX24  
A42MX36  
C, I, A, M  
C, I, M  
C, I, A, M  
C, I, A, M  
C, I, A, M  
C, I, A, M  
C, I, A, M  
C, I, M  
C, I, M  
C, I, M  
C, I, A, M  
C, I, A, M  
C, I, M  
C, I, A, M  
C, I, A, M  
C, I, A, M  
C, I, A, M  
C, I, A, M  
C, I, A, M  
C, I, A, M  
C, I, A, M  
C, I, A, M  
C, I, A, M  
C, I, A, M  
C, I, M  
C, M, B  
C, M, B  
C = Commercial  
I = Industrial  
A = Automotive  
M = Military  
B = MIL-STD-883 Class B  
Speed Grade Offerings  
– F  
Std  
–1  
–2  
–3  
C
I
A
M
B
Note: Refer to the 40MX and 42MX Automotive Family FPGAs datasheet for details on automotive-grade MX offerings.  
Contact your local Microsemi SoC Products Group representative for device availability.  
Revision 12  
iii  
 
 
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table of Contents  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1  
MX Architectural Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1  
Other Architectural Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8  
Power Dissipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10  
Development Tool Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16  
Related Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16  
5.0 V Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17  
3.3 V Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19  
Mixed 5.0 V / 3.3 V Operating Conditions (for 42MX Devices Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21  
Timing Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27  
Timing Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35  
Pin Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-83  
Package Pin Assignments  
PL44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1  
PL68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3  
PL84 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5  
PQ100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9  
PQ160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13  
PQ208 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19  
PQ240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26  
VQ80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30  
VQ100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32  
TQ176 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34  
CQ208 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40  
CQ256 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43  
BG272 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47  
Datasheet Information  
List of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1  
Datasheet Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3  
Revision 12  
iv  
1 – 40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
General Description  
Microsemi's 40MX and 42MX families offer a cost-effective design solution at 5V. The MX devices are single-chip  
solutions and provide high performance while shortening the system design and development cycle. MX devices can  
integrate and consolidate logic implemented in multiple PALs, CPLDs, and FPGAs. Example applications include high-  
speed controllers and address decoding, peripheral bus interfaces, DSP, and co-processor functions.  
The MX device architecture is based on Microsemi’s patented antifuse technology implemented in a 0.45µm triple-  
metal CMOS process. With capacities ranging from 3,000 to 54,000 system gates, the MX devices provide  
performance up to 250 MHz, are live on power-up and have one-fifth the standby power consumption of comparable  
FPGAs. MX FPGAs provide up to 202 user I/Os and are available in a wide variety of packages and speed grades.  
A42MX24 and A42MX36 devices also feature MultiPlex I/Os, which support mixed-voltage systems, enable  
programmable PCI, deliver high-performance operation at both 5.0V and 3.3V, and provide a low-power mode. The  
devices are fully compliant with the PCI Local Bus Specification (version 2.1). They deliver 200 MHz on-chip operation  
and 6.1 ns clock-to-output performance.  
The 42MX24 and 42MX36 devices include system-level features such as IEEE Standard 1149.1 (JTAG) Boundary  
Scan Testing and fast wide-decode modules. In addition, the A42MX36 device offers dual-port SRAM for implementing  
fast FIFOs, LIFOs, and temporary data storage. The storage elements can efficiently address applications requiring  
wide datapath manipulation and can perform transformation functions such as those required for telecommunications,  
networking, and DSP.  
All MX devices are fully tested over automotive and military temperature ranges. In addition, the largest member of the  
family, the A42MX36, is available in both CQ208 and CQ256 ceramic packages screened to MIL-STD-883 levels. For  
easy prototyping and conversion from plastic to ceramic, the CQ208 and PQ208 devices are pin-compatible.  
MX Architectural Overview  
The MX devices are composed of fine-grained building blocks that enable fast, efficient logic designs. All devices  
within these families are composed of logic modules, I/O modules, routing resources and clock networks, which are  
the building blocks for fast logic designs. In addition, the A42MX36 device contains embedded dual-port SRAM  
modules, which are optimized for high-speed datapath functions such as FIFOs, LIFOs and scratchpad memory.  
A42MX24 and A42MX36 also contain wide-decode modules.  
Logic Modules  
The 40MX logic module is an eight-input, one-output logic circuit designed to implement a wide range of logic functions  
with efficient use of interconnect routing resources (Figure 1-1 on page 1-2).  
The logic module can implement the four basic logic functions (NAND, AND, OR and NOR) in gates of two, three, or  
four inputs. The logic module can also implement a variety of D-latches, exclusivity functions, AND-ORs and OR-  
ANDs. No dedicated hard-wired latches or flip-flops are required in the array; latches and flip-flops can be constructed  
from logic modules whenever required in the application.  
Revision 12  
1-1  
 
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Figure 1-1 • 42MX C-Module Implementation  
The 42MX devices contain three types of logic modules: combinatorial (C-modules), sequential (S-modules) and  
decode (D-modules). Figure 1-2 illustrates the combinatorial logic module. The S-module, shown in Figure 1-3,  
implements the same combinatorial logic function as the C-module while adding a sequential element. The sequential  
element can be configured as either a D-flip-flop or a transparent latch. The S-module register can be bypassed so that  
it implements purely combinatorial logic.  
A0  
B0  
S0  
D00  
D01  
Y
D10  
D11  
S1  
A1  
B1  
Figure 1-2 • 42MX C-Module Implementation  
Revision 12  
1-2  
 
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
D00  
D01  
D00  
D01  
D
D
Q
OUT  
Q
OUT  
Y
Y
D10  
D10  
S0  
D11  
S1  
S0  
D11  
S1  
GATE  
CLR  
Up to 7-Input Function Plus Latch  
Up to 7-Input Function Plus D-Type Flip-Flop with Clear  
D00  
D01  
D0  
Y
OUT  
Q
D10  
D
Y
OUT  
S0  
D11  
S1  
D1  
GATE  
CLR  
S
Up to 8-Input Function (Same as C-Module)  
Up to 4-Input Function Plus Latch with Clear  
Figure 1-3 • 42MX S-Module Implementation  
A42MX24 and A42MX36 devices contain D-modules, which are arranged around the periphery of the device. D-  
modules contain wide-decode circuitry, providing a fast, wide-input AND function similar to that found in CPLD  
architectures (Figure 1-4 on page 1-4). The D-module allows A42MX24 and A42MX36 devices to perform wide-  
decode functions at speeds comparable to CPLDs and PALs. The output of the D-module has a programmable  
inverter for active HIGH or LOW assertion. The D-module output is hardwired to an output pin, and can also be fed  
back into the array to be incorporated into other logic.  
Dual-Port SRAM Modules  
The A42MX36 device contains dual-port SRAM modules that have been optimized for synchronous or asynchronous  
applications. The SRAM modules are arranged in 256-bit blocks that can be configured as 32x8 or 64x4. SRAM  
modules can be cascaded together to form memory spaces of user-definable width and depth. A block diagram of the  
A42MX36 dual-port SRAM block is shown in Figure 1-5 on page 1-4.  
The A42MX36 SRAM modules are true dual-port structures containing independent read and write ports. Each SRAM  
module contains six bits of read and write addressing (RDAD[5:0] and WRAD[5:0], respectively) for 64x4-bit blocks.  
When configured in byte mode, the highest order address bits (RDAD5 and WRAD5) are not used. The read and write  
ports of the SRAM block contain independent clocks (RCLK and WCLK) with programmable polarities offering active  
HIGH or LOW implementation. The SRAM block contains eight data inputs (WD[7:0]), and eight outputs (RD[7:0]),  
which are connected to segmented vertical routing tracks.  
The A42MX36 dual-port SRAM blocks provide an optimal solution for high-speed buffered applications requiring FIFO  
and LIFO queues. The ACTgen Macro Builder within Microsemi's Designer software provides capability to quickly  
design memory functions with the SRAM blocks. Unused SRAM blocks can be used to implement registers for other  
user logic within the design.  
1-3  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
7 Inputs  
Hard-Wire t o I/O  
Program mable  
Invert er  
Feedback to Array  
Figure 1-4 • A42MX24 and A42MX36 D-Module Implementation  
Latches  
WD[7:0]  
[7:0]  
[5:0]  
RDAD[5:0]  
SRAM Module  
32 x 8 or 64 x 4 Port  
Logic  
Latches  
Write  
Port  
Read  
Logic  
(256 Bit s)  
[5:0]  
WRAD[5:0]  
MODE  
BLKEN  
WEN  
Read  
Logic  
Lat ches  
REN  
RD[7:0]  
RCLK  
Write  
Logic  
Rout ing Tracks  
WCLK  
Figure 1-5 • A42MX36 Dual-Port SRAM Block  
Routing Structure  
The MX architecture uses vertical and horizontal routing tracks to interconnect the various logic and I/O modules.  
These routing tracks are metal interconnects that may be continuous or split into segments. Varying segment lengths  
allow the interconnect of over 90% of design tracks to occur with only two antifuse connections. Segments can be  
joined together at the ends using antifuses to increase their lengths up to the full length of the track. All interconnects  
can be accomplished with a maximum of four antifuses.  
Horizontal Routing  
Horizontal routing tracks span the whole row length or are divided into multiple segments and are located in between  
the rows of modules. Any segment that spans more than one-third of the row length is considered a long horizontal  
segment. A typical channel is shown in Figure 1-6. Within horizontal routing, dedicated routing tracks are used for  
global clock networks and for power and ground tie-off tracks. Non-dedicated tracks are used for signal nets.  
Vertical Routing  
Another set of routing tracks run vertically through the module. There are three types of vertical tracks: input, output,  
and long. Long tracks span the column length of the module, and can be divided into multiple segments. Each  
segment in an input track is dedicated to the input of a particular module; each segment in an output track is dedicated  
to the output of a particular module. Long segments are uncommitted and can be assigned during routing.  
Each output segment spans four channels (two above and two below), except near the top and bottom of the array,  
where edge effects occur. Long vertical tracks contain either one or two segments. An example of vertical routing  
tracks and segments is shown in Figure 1-6.  
Revision 12  
1-4  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Antifuse Structures  
An antifuse is a "normally open" structure. The use of antifuses to implement a programmable logic device results in  
highly testable structures as well as efficient programming algorithms. There are no  
pre-existing connections; temporary connections can be made using pass transistors. These temporary connections  
can isolate individual antifuses to be programmed and individual circuit structures to be tested, which can be done  
before and after programming. For instance, all metal tracks can be tested for continuity and shorts between adjacent  
tracks, and the functionality of all logic modules can be verified.  
Segmented  
Horizontal  
Routing  
Logic  
Modules  
Antifuses  
Vert ical Rout ing Tracks  
Figure 1-6 • MX Routing Structure  
Clock Networks  
The 40MX devices have one global clock distribution network (CLK). A signal can be put on the CLK network by being  
routed through the CLKBUF buffer.  
In 42MX devices, there are two low-skew, high-fanout clock distribution networks, referred to as CLKA and CLKB.  
Each network has a clock module (CLKMOD) that can select the source of the clock signal from any of the following  
(Figure 1-7 on page 1-6):  
Externally from the CLKA pad, using CLKBUF buffer  
Externally from the CLKB pad, using CLKBUF buffer  
Internally from the CLKINTA input, using CLKINT buffer  
Internally from the CLKINTB input, using CLKINT buffer  
The clock modules are located in the top row of I/O modules. Clock drivers and a dedicated horizontal clock track are  
located in each horizontal routing channel.  
Clock input pads in both 40MX and 42MX devices can also be used as normal I/Os, bypassing the clock networks.  
The A42MX36 device has four additional register control resources, called quadrant clock networks (Figure 1-8 on  
page 1-6). Each quadrant clock provides a local, high-fanout resource to the contiguous logic modules within its  
quadrant of the device. Quadrant clock signals can originate from specific I/O pins or from the internal array and can  
be used as a secondary register clock, register clear, or output enable.  
1-5  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
CLKB  
CLKA  
CLKINB  
CLKINA  
From  
Pads  
S0  
S1  
Internal  
Signal  
CLKMOD  
CLKO(17)  
CLKO(16)  
CLKO(15)  
Clock  
Drivers  
CLKO(2)  
CLKO(1)  
Clock Tracks  
Figure 1-7 • Clock Networks of 42MX Devices  
QCLKA  
QCLKC  
Quad  
Clock  
Modul  
Quad  
Clock  
Modul  
QCLK1  
QCLK3  
QCLKD  
QCLKB  
*QCLK1IN  
*QCLK3IN  
S0 S1  
S1 S0  
Quad  
Clock  
Modul  
Quad  
Clock  
Modul  
QCLK2  
QCLK4  
*QCLK2IN  
*QCLK4IN  
S0 S1  
S1 S0  
Note: *QCLK1IN, QCLK2IN, QCLK3IN, and QCLK4IN are internally-generated signals.  
Figure 1-8 • Quadrant Clock Network of A42MX36 Devices  
Revision 12  
1-6  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
MultiPlex I/O Modules  
42MX devices feature Multiplex I/Os and support 5.0V, 3.3V, and mixed 3.3V/5.0V operations.  
The MultiPlex I/O modules provide the interface between the device pins and the logic array. Figure 1-9 is a block  
diagram of the 42MX I/O module. A variety of user functions, determined by a library macro selection, can be  
implemented in the module. (Refer to the Antifuse Macro Library Guide for more information.) All 42MX I/O modules  
contain tristate buffers, with input and output latches that can be configured for input, output, or bidirectional operation.  
All 42MX devices contain flexible I/O structures, where each output pin has a dedicated output-enable control  
(Figure 1-9). The I/O module can be used to latch input or output data, or both, providing fast set-up time. In addition,  
the Designer software tools can build a D-type flip-flop using a C-module combined with an I/O module to register input  
and output signals. Refer to the Antifuse Macro Library Guide for more details.  
A42MX24 and A42MX36 devices also offer selectable PCI output drives, enabling 100% compliance with version 2.1  
of the PCI specification. For low-power systems, all inputs and outputs are turned off to reduce current consumption to  
below 500A.  
To achieve 5.0V or 3.3V PCI-compliant output drives on A42MX24 and A42MX36 devices, a chip-wide PCI fuse is  
programmed via the Device Selection Wizard in the Designer software (Figure 1-10). When the PCI fuse is not  
programmed, the output drive is standard.  
Designer software development tools provide a design library of I/O macro functions that can implement all I/O  
configurations supported by the MX FPGAs.  
EN  
Q
D
PAD  
From Array  
To Array  
G/CLK*  
Q
D
G/CLK*  
Note: *Can be configured as a Latch or D Flip-Flop (Using C-Module)  
Figure 1-9 • 42MX I/O Module  
STD  
Signal  
Out put  
PCI  
Drive  
PCI Enable  
Fuse  
Figure 1-10 • PCI Output Structure of A42MX24 and A42MX36 Devices  
1-7  
Revision 12  
 
 
 
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Other Architectural Features  
Performance  
MX devices can operate with internal clock frequencies of 250 MHz, enabling fast execution of complex logic functions.  
MX devices are live on power-up and do not require auxiliary configuration devices and thus are an optimal platform to  
integrate the functionality contained in multiple programmable logic devices. In addition, designs that previously would  
have required a gate array to meet performance can be integrated into an MX device with improvements in cost and  
time-to-market. Using timing-driven place-and-route (TDPR) tools, designers can achieve highly deterministic device  
performance.  
User Security  
Microsemi FuseLock provides robust security against design theft. Special security fuses are hidden in the fabric of the  
device and protect against unauthorized users attempting to access the programming and/or probe interfaces. It is  
virtually impossible to identify or bypass these fuses without damaging the device, making Microsemi antifuse FPGAs  
protected with the highest level of security available from both invasive and noninvasive attacks.  
Special security fuses in 40MX devices include the Probe Fuse and Program Fuse. The former disables the probing  
circuitry while the latter prohibits further programming of all fuses, including the Probe Fuse. In 42MX devices, there is  
the Security Fuse which, when programmed, both disables the probing circuitry and prohibits further programming of  
the device.  
Programming  
Device programming is supported through the Silicon Sculptor series of programmers. Silicon Sculptor II is a compact,  
robust, single-site and multi-site device programmer for the PC. With standalone software, Silicon Sculptor II is  
designed to allow concurrent programming of multiple units from the same PC.  
Silicon Sculptor II programs devices independently to achieve the fastest programming times possible. After being  
programmed, each fuse is verified to insure that it has been programmed correctly. Furthermore, at the end of  
programming, there are integrity tests that are run to ensure no extra fuses have been programmed. Not only does it  
test fuses (both programmed and non-programmed), Silicon Sculptor II also allows self-test to verify its own hardware  
extensively.  
The procedure for programming an MX device using Silicon Sculptor II is as follows:  
1. Load the *.AFM file  
2. Select the device to be programmed  
3. Begin programming  
When the design is ready to go to production, Microsemi offers device volume-programming services either through  
distribution partners or via In-House Programming from the factory.  
For more details on programming MX devices, please refer to the Programming Antifuse Devices and the Silicon  
Sculptor II and Silicon Sculptor 3 user guides.  
Revision 12  
1-8  
 
 
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Power Supply  
MX devices are designed to operate in both 5.0V and 3.3V environments. In particular, 42MX devices can operate in  
mixed 5.0 V/3.3 V systems. Table 1-1 describes the voltage support of MX devices.  
Table 1-1 • Voltage Support of MX Devices  
Device  
VCC  
5.0 V  
3.3 V  
VCCA  
VCCI  
Maximum Input Tolerance  
Nominal Output Voltage  
40MX  
5.5 V  
3.6 V  
5.5 V  
3.6 V  
5.5 V  
5.0 V  
3.3 V  
5.0 V  
3.3 V  
3.3 V  
42MX  
5.0 V  
3.3 V  
5.0 V  
5.0 V  
3.3 V  
3.3 V  
For A42MX24 and A42MX36 devices the VCCA supply has to be monotonic during power up in order for the POR to  
issue reset to the JTAG state machine correctly. For more information, refer to MX_PowerUp_AN, (AC291).  
Power-Up/Down in Mixed-Voltage Mode  
When powering up 42MX in mixed voltage mode (VCCA = 5.0 V and VCCI = 3.3 V), VCCA must be greater than or  
equal to VCCI throughout the power-up sequence. If VCCI exceeds VCCA during  
power-up, one of two things will happen:  
The input protection diode on the I/Os will be forward biased  
The I/Os will be at logical High  
In either case, ICC rises to high levels.  
For power-down, any sequence with VCCA and VCCI can be implemented.  
Transient Current  
Due to the simultaneous random logic switching activity during power-up, a transient current may appear on the core  
supply (VCC). Customers must use a regulator for the VCC supply that can source a minimum of 100 mA for transient  
current during power-up. Failure to provide enough power can prevent the system from powering up properly and  
result in functional failure. However, there are no reliability concerns, since transient current is distributed across the  
die instead of confined to a localized spot.  
Since the transient current is not due to I/O switching, its value and duration are independent of the VCCI.  
Low Power Mode  
42MX devices have been designed with a Low Power Mode. This feature, activated with setting the special LP pin to  
HIGH for a period longer than 800 ns, is particularly useful for battery-operated systems where battery life is a primary  
concern. In this mode, the core of the device is turned off and the device consumes minimal power with low standby  
current. In addition, all input buffers are turned off, and all outputs and bidirectional buffers are tristated. Since the core  
of the device is turned off, the states of the registers are lost. The device must be re-initialized when exiting Low Power  
Mode. I/Os can be driven during LP mode, and clock pins should be driven HIGH or LOW and should not float to avoid  
drawing current. To exit LP mode, the LP pin must be pulled LOW for over 200 µs to allow for charge pumps to power  
up, and device initialization will begin.  
1-9  
Revision 12  
 
 
 
 
 
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Power Dissipation  
The general power consumption of MX devices is made up of static and dynamic power and can be expressed with the  
following equation.  
General Power Equation  
P = [ICCstandby + ICCactive] * VCCI + IOL* VOL* N + IOH * (VCCI – VOH) * M  
where:  
ICCstandby is the current flowing when no inputs or outputs are changing.  
ICCactive is the current flowing due to CMOS switching.  
IOL, IOH are TTL sink/source currents.  
VOL, VOH are TTL level output voltages.  
N equals the number of outputs driving TTL loads to VOL.  
M equals the number of outputs driving TTL loads to VOH.  
Accurate values for N and M are difficult to determine because they depend on the family type, on design details, and  
on the system I/O. The power can be divided into two components: static and active.  
Static Power Component  
The static power due to standby current is typically a small component of the overall power consumption. Standby  
power is calculated for commercial, worst-case conditions. The static power dissipation by TTL loads depends on the  
number of outputs driving, and on the DC load current. For instance, a 32-bit bus sinking 4mA at 0.33V will generate  
42mW with all outputs driving LOW, and 140mW with all outputs driving HIGH. The actual dissipation will average  
somewhere in between, as I/Os switch states with time.  
Active Power Component  
Power dissipation in CMOS devices is usually dominated by the dynamic power dissipation. Dynamic power  
consumption is frequency-dependent and is a function of the logic and the external I/O. Active power dissipation  
results from charging internal chip capacitances of the interconnect, unprogrammed antifuses, module inputs, and  
module outputs, plus external capacitances due to PC board traces and load device inputs. An additional component  
of the active power dissipation is the totem pole current in the CMOS transistor pairs. The net effect can be associated  
with an equivalent capacitance that can be combined with frequency and voltage to represent active power dissipation.  
The power dissipated by a CMOS circuit can be expressed by the equation:  
Power (µW) = CEQ * VCCA2 * F(1)  
where:  
CEQ = Equivalent capacitance expressed in picofarads (pF)  
VCCA = Power supply in volts (V)  
F = Switching frequency in megahertz (MHz)  
Equivalent Capacitance  
Equivalent capacitance is calculated by measuring ICCactive at a specified frequency and voltage for each circuit  
component of interest. Measurements have been made over a range of frequencies at a fixed value of VCC.  
Equivalent capacitance is frequency-independent, so the results can be used over a wide range of operating  
conditions. Equivalent capacitance values are shown below.  
Revision 12  
1-10  
 
 
 
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
C
Values for Microsemi MX FPGAs  
EQ  
Modules (CEQM)3.5  
Input Buffers (CEQI)6.9  
Output Buffers (CEQO)18.2  
Routed Array Clock Buffer Loads (CEQCR)1.4  
To calculate the active power dissipated from the complete design, the switching frequency of each part of the logic  
must be known. The equation below shows a piece-wise linear summation over all components.  
Power = VCCA2 * [(m x CEQM * fm)Modules  
(n * CEQI * fn)Inputs + (p * (CEQO + CL) * fp)outputs  
0.5 * (q1 * CEQCR * fq1 routed_Clk1 + (r1 * fq1 routed_Clk1  
0.5 * (q2 * CEQCR * fq2 routed_Clk2 + (r2 * fq2 routed_Clk2  
+
+
)
)
)
)
+
(2)  
where:  
m
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Number of logic modules switching at frequency fm  
Number of input buffers switching at frequency fn  
Number of output buffers switching at frequency fp  
Number of clock loads on the first routed array clock  
Number of clock loads on the second routed array clock  
Fixed capacitance due to first routed array clock  
Fixed capacitance due to second routed array clock  
Equivalent capacitance of logic modules in pF  
Equivalent capacitance of input buffers in pF  
Equivalent capacitance of output buffers in pF  
Equivalent capacitance of routed array clock in pF  
Output load capacitance in pF  
n
p
q1  
q2  
r1  
r2  
CEQM  
CEQI  
CEQO  
CEQCR  
CL  
fm  
Average logic module switching rate in MHz  
Average input buffer switching rate in MHz  
fn  
fp  
Average output buffer switching rate in MHz  
Average first routed array clock rate in MHz  
Average second routed array clock rate in MHz  
fq1  
fq2  
Fixed Capacitance Values for MX FPGAs (pF)  
Device Type  
A40MX02  
A40MX04  
A42MX09  
A42MX16  
A42MX24  
A42MX36  
r1 routed_Clk1  
r2 routed_Clk2  
41.4  
68.6  
118  
165  
185  
220  
N/A  
N/A  
118  
165  
185  
220  
1-11  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Test Circuitry and Silicon Explorer II Probe  
MX devices contain probing circuitry that provides built-in access to every node in a design, via the use of Silicon  
Explorer II. Silicon Explorer II is an integrated hardware and software solution that, in conjunction with the Designer  
software, allow users to examine any of the internal nets of the device while it is operating in a prototyping or a  
production system. The user can probe into an MX device without changing the placement and routing of the design  
and without using any additional resources. Silicon Explorer II's noninvasive method does not alter timing or loading  
effects, thus shortening the debug cycle and providing a true representation of the device under actual functional  
situations.  
Silicon Explorer II samples data at 100 MHz (asynchronous) or 66 MHz (synchronous). Silicon Explorer II attaches to a  
PC's standard COM port, turning the PC into a fully functional 18-channel logic analyzer. Silicon Explorer II allows  
designers to complete the design verification process at their desks and reduces verification time from several hours  
per cycle to a few seconds.  
Silicon Explorer II is used to control the MODE, DCLK, SDI and SDO pins in MX devices to select the desired nets for  
debugging. The user simply assigns the selected internal nets in the Silicon Explorer II software to the PRA/PRB  
output pins for observation. Probing functionality is activated when the MODE pin is held HIGH.  
Figure 1-11 illustrates the interconnection between Silicon Explorer II and 40MX devices, while Figure 1-12 on  
page 1-12 illustrates the interconnection between Silicon Explorer II and 42MX devices  
To allow for probing capabilities, the security fuses must not be programmed. (Refer to "User Security" section on  
page 1-8 for the security fuses of 40MX and 42MX devices). Table 1-2 on page 1-13 summarizes the possible device  
configurations for probing.  
PRA and PRB pins are dual-purpose pins. When the "Reserve Probe Pin" is checked in the  
Designer software, PRA and PRB pins are reserved as dedicated outputs for probing. If PRA and PRB pins are  
required as user I/Os to achieve successful layout and "Reserve Probe Pin" is checked, the layout tool will override the  
option and place user I/Os on PRA and PRB pins.  
16 Logic Analyzer Channels  
40MX  
Serial Connection  
to Windows PC  
MODE  
SDI  
DCLK  
Silicon  
Explorer II  
SDO  
PRA  
PRB  
Figure 1-11 • Silicon Explorer II Setup with 40MX  
16 Logic Analyzer Channels  
42MX  
Serial Connection  
to Windows PC  
MODE  
SDI  
DCLK  
Silicon  
Explorer II  
SDO  
PRA  
PRB  
Figure 1-12 • Silicon Explorer II Setup with 42MX  
Revision 12  
1-12  
 
 
 
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-2 • Device Configuration Options for Probe Capability  
Security Fuse(s) Programmed  
Mode  
LOW  
HIGH  
PRA, PRB1  
User I/Os2  
SDI, SDO, DCLK1  
User I/Os2  
No  
No  
Probe Circuit Outputs  
Probe Circuit Secured  
Probe Circuit Inputs  
Probe Circuit Secured  
Yes  
Notes:  
1. Avoid using SDI, SDO, DCLK, PRA and PRB pins as input or bidirectional ports. Since these pins are active during  
probing, input signals will not pass through these pins and may cause contention.  
2. If no user signal is assigned to these pins, they will behave as unused I/Os in this mode. See the "Pin Descriptions"  
section on page 1-83 for information on unused I/O pins.  
Design Consideration  
It is recommended to use a series 70termination resistor on every probe connector (SDI, SDO, MODE, DCLK, PRA  
and PRB). The 70series termination is used to prevent data transmission corruption during probing and reading  
back the checksum.  
IEEE Standard 1149.1 Boundary Scan Test (BST) Circuitry  
42MX24 and 42MX36 devices are compatible with IEEE Standard 1149.1 (informally known as Joint Testing Action  
Group Standard or JTAG), which defines a set of hardware architecture and mechanisms for cost-effective board-level  
testing. The basic MX boundary-scan logic circuit is composed of the TAP (test access port), TAP controller, test data  
registers and instruction register (Figure 1-13 on page 1-14). This circuit supports all mandatory IEEE 1149.1  
instructions (EXTEST, SAMPLE/PRELOAD and BYPASS) and some optional instructions. Table 1-3 on page 1-14  
describes the ports that control JTAG testing, while Table 1-4 on page 1-14 describes the test instructions supported  
by these MX devices.  
Each test section is accessed through the TAP, which has four associated pins: TCK (test clock input), TDI and TDO  
(test data input and output), and TMS (test mode selector).  
The TAP controller is a four-bit state machine. The '1's and '0's represent the values that must be present at TMS at a  
rising edge of TCK for the given state transition to occur. IR and DR indicate that the instruction register or the data  
register is operating in that state.  
The TAP controller receives two control inputs (TMS and TCK) and generates control and clock signals for the rest of  
the test logic architecture. On power-up, the TAP controller enters the Test-Logic-Reset state. To guarantee a reset of  
the controller from any of the possible states, TMS must remain high for five TCK cycles.  
42MX24 and 42MX36 devices support three types of test data registers: bypass, device identification, and boundary  
scan. The bypass register is selected when no other register needs to be accessed in a device. This speeds up test  
data transfer to other devices in a test data path. The 32-bit device identification register is a shift register with four  
fields (lowest significant byte (LSB), ID number, part number and version). The boundary-scan register observes and  
controls the state of each I/O pin.  
Each I/O cell has three boundary-scan register cells, each with a serial-in, serial-out, parallel-in, and parallel-out pin.  
The serial pins are used to serially connect all the boundary-scan register cells in a device into a boundary-scan  
register chain, which starts at the TDI pin and ends at the TDO pin. The parallel ports are connected to the internal  
core logic tile and the input, output and control ports of an I/O buffer to capture and load data into the register to control  
or observe the logic state of each I/O.  
1-13  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Boundary Scan Register  
Output  
TDO  
MUX  
Bypass  
Register  
Control Logic  
JTAG  
TMS  
TCK  
JTAG  
TDI  
Instruction  
Decode  
TAP Controller  
Instruction  
Register  
Figure 1-13 • 42MX IEEE 1149.1 Boundary Scan Circuitry  
Table 1-3 • Test Access Port Descriptions  
Port  
Description  
TMS  
(Test Mode Select)  
Serial input for the test logic control bits. Data is captured on the rising edge of the test logic  
clock (TCK).  
TCK  
(Test Clock Input)  
Dedicated test logic clock used serially to shift test instruction, test data, and control inputs on  
the rising edge of the clock, and serially to shift the output data on the falling edge of the clock.  
The maximum clock frequency for TCK is 20 MHz.  
TDI  
Serial input for instruction and test data. Data is captured on the rising edge of the test logic  
clock.  
(Test Data Input)  
TDO  
(Test Data Output)  
Serial output for test instruction and data from the test logic. TDO is set to an Inactive Drive  
state (high impedance) when data scanning is not in progress.  
Table 1-4 • Supported BST Public Instructions  
IR Code Instruction  
Instruction  
(IR2.IR0)  
Type  
Description  
EXTEST  
000  
Mandatory Allows the external circuitry and board-level interconnections to be  
tested by forcing a test pattern at the output pins and capturing test  
results at the input pins.  
SAMPLE/PRELOAD  
HIGH Z  
001  
101  
110  
Mandatory Allows a snapshot of the signals at the device pins to be captured  
and examined during operation  
Optional  
Tristates all I/Os to allow external signals to drive pins. Please refer to  
the IEEE Standard 1149.1 specification.  
CLAMP  
Optional  
Allows state of signals driven from component pins to be determined  
from the Boundary-Scan Register. Please refer to the IEEE Standard  
1149.1 specification for details.  
BYPASS  
111  
Mandatory Enables the bypass register between the TDI and TDO pins. The test  
data passes through the selected device to adjacent devices in the  
test chain.  
Revision 12  
1-14  
 
 
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
JTAG Mode Activation  
The JTAG test logic circuit is activated in the Designer software by selecting Tools > Device Selection. This brings up  
the Device Selection dialog box as shown in Figure 1-14. The JTAG test logic circuit can be enabled by clicking the  
"Reserve JTAG Pins" check box. Table 1-5 explains the pins' behavior in either mode.  
Figure 1-14 • Device Selection Wizard  
Table 1-5 • Boundary Scan Pin Configuration and Functionality  
Reserve JTAG  
TCK  
Checked  
Unchecked  
User I/O  
BST input; must be terminated to logical HIGH or LOW to avoid floating  
BST input; may float or be tied to HIGH  
TDI, TMS  
TDO  
User I/O  
BST output; may float or be connected to TDI of another device  
User I/O  
TRST Pin and TAP Controller Reset  
An active reset (TRST) pin is not supported; however, MX devices contain power-on circuitry that resets the boundary  
scan circuitry upon power-up. Also, the TMS pin is equipped with an internal pull-up resistor. This allows the TAP  
controller to remain in or return to the Test-Logic-Reset state when there is no input or when a logical 1 is on the TMS  
pin. To reset the controller, TMS must be HIGH for at least five TCK cycles.  
Boundary Scan Description Language (BSDL) File  
Conforming to the IEEE Standard 1149.1 requires that the operation of the various JTAG components be documented.  
The BSDL file provides the standard format to describe the JTAG components that can be used by automatic test  
equipment software. The file includes the instructions that are supported, instruction bit pattern, and the boundary-  
scan chain order. For an in-depth discussion on BSDL files, please refer tothe BSDL Files Format Description  
application note.  
BSDL files are grouped into two categories - generic and device-specific. The generic files assign all user I/Os as  
inouts. Device-specific files assign user I/Os as inputs, outputs or inouts.  
Generic files for MX devices are available on the Microsemi SoC Product Group's website:  
http://www.microsemi.com/soc/techdocs/models/bsdl.html.  
1-15  
Revision 12  
 
 
 
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Development Tool Support  
The MX family of FPGAs is fully supported by Libero® Integrated Design Environment (IDE). Libero IDE is a design  
management environment, seamlessly integrating design tools while guiding the user through the design flow,  
managing all design and log files, and passing necessary design data among tools. Libero IDE allows users to  
integrate both schematic and HDL synthesis into a single flow and verify the entire design in a single environment.  
Libero IDE includes SynplifyPro from Synopsys, ModelSim® HDL Simulator from Mentor Graphics,® and Viewdraw.  
Libero IDE includes place-and-route and provides a comprehensive suite of backend support tools for FPGA  
development, including timing-driven place-and-route, and a world-class integrated static timing analyzer and  
constraints editor.  
Additionally, the back-annotation flow is compatible with all the major simulators and the simulation results can be  
cross-probed with Silicon Explorer II, Microsemi’s integrated verification and logic analysis tool. Another tool included  
in the Libero software is the SmartGen macro builder, which easily creates popular and commonly used logic functions  
for implementation into your schematic or HDL design.  
Microsemi’s Libero software is compatible with the most popular FPGA design entry and verification tools from  
companies such as Mentor Graphics, Synopsys, and Cadence Design Systems.  
Refer to the Libero IDE web content at www.microsemi.com/soc/products/software/libero/default.aspx for further  
information on licensing and current operating system support.  
Related Documents  
Application Notes  
BSDL Files Format Description  
www.microsemi.com/soc/documents/BSDLformat_AN.pdf  
Programming Antifuse Devices  
http://www.microsemi.com/soc/documents/AntifuseProgram_AN.pdf  
Implementation of Security in Microsemi Antifuse FPGAs  
www.microsemi.com/documents/Antifuse_Security_AN.pdf  
User Guides and Manuals  
Antifuse Macro Library Guide  
www.microsemicom/soc/documents/libguide_UG.pdf  
Silicon Sculptor II and Silicon Sculptor 3 User Guide  
www.microsemi.com/soc/techdocs/manuals/default.asp#programmers  
Miscellaneous  
Libero IDE Flow Diagram  
www.microsemi.com/soc/products/tools/libero/flow.html  
Revision 12  
1-16  
 
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
5.0 V Operating Conditions  
Table 1-6 • Absolute Maximum Ratings for 40MX Devices*  
Symbol  
VCC  
VI  
Parameter  
DC Supply Voltage  
Limits  
Units  
V
–0.5 to +7.0  
Input Voltage  
–0.5 to VCC+0.5  
–0.5 to VCC+0.5  
–65 to +150  
V
VO  
Output Voltage  
Storage Temperature  
V
tSTG  
°C  
Note: *Stresses beyond those listed under "Absolute Maximum Ratings" may cause permanent damage to the device.  
Exposure to absolute maximum rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. Devices  
should not be operated outside the Recommended Operating Conditions.  
Table 1-7 • Absolute Maximum Ratings for 42MX Devices*  
Symbol  
VCCI  
VCCA  
VI  
Parameter  
DC Supply Voltage for I/Os  
DC Supply Voltage for Array  
Input Voltage  
Limits  
Units  
V
–0.5 to +7.0  
–0.5 to +7.0  
V
–0.5 to VCCI+0.5  
–0.5 to VCCI+0.5  
–65 to +150  
V
VO  
Output Voltage  
V
tSTG  
Storage Temperature  
°C  
Note: *Stresses beyond those listed under "Absolute Maximum Ratings" may cause permanent damage to the device.  
Exposure to absolute maximum rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. Devices  
should not be operated outside the Recommended Operating Conditions.  
Table 1-8 • Recommended Operating Conditions  
Parameter  
Commercial  
0 to +70  
Industrial  
–40 to +85  
4.5 to 5.5  
4.5 to 5.5  
4.5 to 5.5  
Military  
–55 to +125  
4.5 to 5.5  
4.5 to 5.5  
4.5 to 5.5  
Units  
°C  
V
Temperature Range*  
VCC (40MX)  
4.75 to 5.25  
4.75 to 5.25  
4.75 to 5.25  
VCCA (42MX)  
VCCI (42MX)  
V
V
Note: *Ambient temperature (TA) is used for commercial and industrial grades; case temperature (TC) is used for  
military grades.  
1-17  
Revision 12  
 
 
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
5 V TTL Electrical Specifications  
Table 1-9 • 5V TTL Electrical Specifications  
Commercial  
Commercial -F  
Industrial  
Military  
Max.  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Units  
Min.  
Max.  
Min.  
Max.  
Min.  
Max.  
Min.  
VOH1  
IOH = –10 mA 2.4  
IOH = –4 mA  
IOL = 10 mA  
IOL = 6 mA  
–0.3  
2.4  
V
V
3.7  
3.7  
VOL1  
0.5  
0.8  
0.5  
0.8  
V
0.4  
0.8  
0.4  
0.8  
V
VIL  
–0.3  
–0.3  
–0.3  
V
VIH (40MX)  
VIH (42MX)  
IIL  
2.0 VCC + 0.3 2.0 VCC + 0.3 2.0 VCC + 0.3 2.0 VCC + 0.3  
2.0 VCCI + 0.3 2.0 VCCI + 0.3 2.0 VCCI + 0.3 2.0 VCCI + 0.3  
V
V
VIN = 0.5 V  
VIN = 2.7 V  
–10  
–10  
500  
–10  
–10  
500  
–10  
–10  
500  
–10  
–10  
500  
µA  
µA  
ns  
IIH  
Input Transition  
Time, TR and TF  
C
IO I/O  
10  
3
10  
25  
10  
10  
10  
25  
pF  
Capacitance  
Standby Current, A40MX02,  
mA  
ICC2  
A40MX04  
A42MX09  
A42MX16  
5
6
25  
25  
25  
25  
25  
25  
25  
25  
25  
mA  
mA  
mA  
A42MX24,  
A42MX36  
20  
Low power mode 42MX devices  
Standby Current only  
0.5  
ICC – 5.0  
ICC – 5.0  
ICC – 5.0  
mA  
IIO, I/O source  
sink current  
Can be derived from the IBIS model (http://www.microsemi.com/soc/techdocs/models/ibis.html)  
Notes:  
1. Only one output tested at a time. VCC/VCCI = min.  
2. All outputs unloaded. All inputs = VCC/VCCI or GND.  
Revision 12  
1-18  
 
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
3.3 V Operating Conditions  
Table 1-10 • Absolute Maximum Ratings for 40MX Devices*  
Symbol  
VCC  
VI  
Parameter  
DC Supply Voltage  
Limits  
Units  
V
–0.5 to +7.0  
Input Voltage  
–0.5 to VCC + 0.5  
–0.5 to VCC + 0.5  
–65 to + 150  
V
VO  
Output Voltage  
Storage Temperature  
V
tSTG  
°C  
Note: *Stresses beyond those listed under "Absolute Maximum Ratings" may cause permanent damage to the device.  
Exposure to absolute maximum rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. Devices  
should not be operated outside the Recommended Operating Conditions.  
Table 1-11 • Absolute Maximum Ratings for 42MX Devices*  
Symbol  
VCCI  
VCCA  
VI  
Parameter  
DC Supply Voltage for I/Os  
DC Supply Voltage for Array  
Input Voltage  
Limits  
Units  
V
–0.5 to +7.0  
–0.5 to +7.0  
V
–0.5 to VCCI+0.5  
–0.5 to VCCI+0.5  
–65 to +150  
V
VO  
Output Voltage  
V
tSTG  
Storage Temperature  
°C  
Note: *Stresses beyond those listed under "Absolute Maximum Ratings" may cause permanent damage to the device.  
Exposure to absolute maximum rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. Devices  
should not be operated outside the Recommended Operating Conditions.  
Table 1-12 • Recommended Operating Conditions  
Parameter  
Commercial  
0 to +70  
Industrial  
–40 to +85  
3.0 to 3.6  
3.0 to 3.6  
3.0 to 3.6  
Military  
–55 to +125  
3.0 to 3.6  
3.0 to 3.6  
3.0 to 3.6  
Units  
°C  
V
Temperature Range*  
VCC (40MX)  
3.0 to 3.6  
3.0 to 3.6  
3.0 to 3.6  
VCCA (42MX)  
VCCI (42MX)  
V
V
Note: *Ambient temperature (TA) is used for commercial and industrial grades; case temperature (TC) is used for  
military grades.  
1-19  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
3.3 V LVTTL Electrical Specifications  
Table 1-13 • 3.3V LVTTL Electrical Specifications  
Commercial  
Commercial -F  
Industrial  
Military  
Max.  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Units  
Min.  
Max.  
Min.  
Max.  
Min.  
Max.  
Min.  
VOH1  
VOL1  
IOH = –4 mA 2.15  
IOL = 6 mA  
–0.3  
2.15  
2.4  
2.4  
V
V
0.4  
0.8  
0.4  
0.8  
0.48  
0.8  
0.48  
0.8  
VIL  
–0.3  
–0.3  
–0.3  
V
VIH (40MX)  
VIH (42MX)  
IIL  
2.0 VCC + 0.3 2.0 VCC + 0.3 2.0 VCC + 0.3 2.0 VCC + 0.3  
2.0 VCCI + 0.3 2.0 VCCI + 0.3 2.0 VCCI + 0.3 2.0 VCCI + 0.3  
V
V
–10  
–10  
500  
–10  
–10  
500  
–10  
–10  
500  
–10  
–10  
500  
µA  
µA  
ns  
IIH  
Input Transition  
Time, TR and TF  
CIO I/O  
Capacitance  
10  
3
10  
25  
10  
10  
10  
25  
pF  
A40MX02,  
A40MX04  
mA  
A42MX09  
A42MX16  
5
6
25  
25  
25  
25  
25  
25  
25  
25  
25  
mA  
mA  
mA  
Standby  
Current, ICC2  
A42MX24,  
A42MX36  
15  
Low-Power  
42MX  
0.5  
ICC - 5.0  
ICC - 5.0  
ICC - 5.0  
mA  
Mode Standby devices only  
Current  
IIO, I/O source Can be derived from the IBIS model (http://www.microsemi.com/soc/techdocs/models/ibis.html)  
sink current  
Notes:  
1. Only one output tested at a time. VCC/VCCI = min.  
2. All outputs unloaded. All inputs = VCC/VCCI or GND.  
Revision 12  
1-20  
 
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Mixed 5.0 V / 3.3 V Operating Conditions (for 42MX Devices  
Only)  
Table 1-14 • Absolute Maximum Ratings*  
Symbol  
VCCI  
VCCA  
VI  
Parameter  
DC Supply Voltage for I/Os  
DC Supply Voltage for Array  
Input Voltage  
Limits  
Units  
V
–0.5 to +7.0  
–0.5 to +7.0  
V
–0.5 to VCCA +0.5  
–0.5 to VCCI + 0.5  
–65 to +150  
V
VO  
Output Voltage  
V
tSTG  
Storage Temperature  
°C  
Note: *Stresses beyond those listed under "Absolute Maximum Ratings" may cause permanent damage to the device.  
Exposure to absolute maximum rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. Devices  
should not be operated outside the Recommended Operating Conditions.  
Table 1-15 • Recommended Operating Conditions  
Parameter  
Temperature Range*  
VCCA  
Commercial  
0 to +70  
Industrial  
–40 to +85  
4.5 to 5.5  
3.0 to 3.6  
Military  
–55 to +125  
4.5 to 5.5  
3.0 to 3.6  
Units  
°C  
V
4.75 to 5.25  
3.14 to 3.47  
VCCI  
V
Note: *Ambient temperature (TA) is used for commercial and industrial grades; case temperature (TC) is used for  
military grades.  
1-21  
Revision 12  
 
 
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Mixed 5.0V/3.3V Electrical Specifications  
Table 1-16 • Mixed 5.0V/3.3V Electrical Specifications  
Commercial  
Commercial –F  
Industrial  
Military  
Max.  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Units  
Min.  
Max.  
Min.  
Max.  
Min.  
Max.  
Min.  
VOH1  
IOH = –10 mA 2.4  
IOH = –4 mA  
IOL = 10 mA  
IOL = 6 mA  
–0.3  
2.4  
V
V
2.4  
2.4  
VOL1  
0.5  
0.8  
0.5  
0.8  
V
0.4  
0.8  
0.4  
0.8  
V
VIL  
VIH  
IL  
–0.3  
–0.3  
–0.3  
V
2.0 VCCA + 0.3 2.0 VCCA + 0.3 2.0 VCCA + 0.3 2.0 VCCA + 0.3  
V
VIN = 0.5 V  
VIN = 2.7 V  
–10  
–10  
500  
–10  
–10  
500  
–10  
–10  
500  
–10  
–10  
500  
µA  
µA  
ns  
IH  
Input Transition  
Time, TR and TF  
C
IO I/O Capacitance  
10  
5
10  
25  
25  
25  
10  
25  
25  
25  
10  
25  
25  
25  
pF  
mA  
mA  
mA  
Standby Current,  
ICC2  
A42MX09  
A42MX16  
6
A42MX24,  
A42MX36  
20  
Low Power Mode  
Standby Current  
0.5  
ICC – 5.0  
ICC – 5.0  
ICC – 5.0  
mA  
IIO I/O source sink Can be derived from the IBIS model (http://www.microsemi.com/soc/techdocs/models/ibis.html)  
current  
Notes:  
1. Only one output tested at a time. VCCI = min.  
2. All outputs unloaded. All inputs = VCCI or GND.  
Revision 12  
1-22  
 
 
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Output Drive Characteristics for 5.0 V PCI Signaling  
MX PCI device I/O drivers were designed specifically for high-performance PCI systems. Figure 1-15 on page 1-25  
shows the typical output drive characteristics of the MX devices. MX output drivers are compliant with the PCI Local  
Bus Specification.  
Table 1-17 • DC Specification (5.0 V PCI Signaling)1  
PCI  
MX  
Max.  
Symbol Parameter  
Units  
Condition  
Min.  
4.75  
2.0  
Max.  
Min.  
4.75  
2.0  
VCCI  
VIH  
VIL  
Supply Voltage for I/Os  
5.25  
5.252  
VCCI + 0.3  
0.8  
V
V
Input High Voltage  
VCC + 0.5  
0.8  
Input Low Voltage  
–0.5  
–0.3  
V
IIH  
Input High Leakage Current  
Input Low Leakage Current  
Output High Voltage  
VIN = 2.7 V  
VIN=0.5 V  
70  
10  
µA  
µA  
V
IIL  
–70  
–10  
VOH  
IOUT = –2 mA  
IOUT = –6 mA  
2.4  
3.84  
VOL  
CIN  
Output Low Voltage  
Input Pin Capacitance  
CLK Pin Capacitance  
Pin Inductance  
IOUT = 3 mA, 6 mA  
0.55  
10  
0.33  
10  
V
pF  
pF  
nH  
CCLK  
LPIN  
5
12  
10  
20  
< 8 nH3  
Notes:  
1. PCI Local Bus Specification, Version 2.1, Section 4.2.1.1.  
2. Maximum rating for VCCI –0.5 V to 7.0V.  
3. Dependent upon the chosen package. PCI recommends QFP and BGA packaging to reduce pin inductance and  
capacitance.  
Table 1-18 • AC Specifications (5.0V PCI Signaling)*  
PCI  
MX  
Symbol Parameter  
Condition  
Units  
Min.  
Max.  
Min.  
–60  
1.8  
Max.  
–10  
2.8  
ICL Low Clamp Current  
–5 < VIN –1  
–25 + (VIN +1) /0.015  
mA  
V/ns  
V/ns  
Slew (r) Output Rise Slew Rate 0.4 V to 2.4 V load  
Slew (f) Output Fall Slew Rate 2.4 V to 0.4 V load  
Note: *PCI Local Bus Specification, Version 2.1, Section 4.2.1.2.  
1
1
5
5
2.8  
4.3  
1-23  
Revision 12  
 
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Output Drive Characteristics for 3.3 V PCI Signaling  
Table 1-19 • DC Specification (3.3 V PCI Signaling)1  
PCI  
MX  
Symbol Parameter  
Condition  
Units  
Min.  
3.0  
Max.  
3.6  
Min.  
3.0  
Max.  
3.6  
VCCI  
VIH  
Supply Voltage for I/Os  
V
V
Input High Voltage  
0.5  
VCC + 0.5  
0.8  
0.5  
VCCI + 0.3  
0.8  
VIL  
Input Low Voltage  
–0.5  
–0.3  
V
IIH  
Input High Leakage Current  
Input Leakage Current  
Output High Voltage  
Output Low Voltage  
Input Pin Capacitance  
CLK Pin Capacitance  
Pin Inductance  
VIN = 2.7V  
70  
10  
µA  
µA  
V
IIL  
–70  
–10  
VOH  
VOL  
CIN  
IOUT = –2 mA  
0.9  
5
3.3  
IOUT = 3 mA, 6 mA  
0.1  
10  
12  
20  
0.1 VCCI  
10  
V
pF  
pF  
nH  
CCLK  
LPIN  
Notes:  
10  
< 8 nH3  
1. PCI Local Bus Specification, Version 2.1, Section 4.2.2.1.  
2. Maximum rating for VCCI –0.5V to 7.0V.  
3. Dependent upon the chosen package. PCI recommends QFP and BGA packaging to reduce pin inductance and  
capacitance.  
Table 1-20 • AC Specifications for (3.3 V PCI Signaling)*  
PCI  
Min.  
MX  
Symbol Parameter  
Condition  
Units  
Max.  
Min.  
–60  
1.8  
Max.  
–10  
2.8  
ICL  
Low Clamp Current  
–5 < VIN –1  
0.2 V to 0.6 V load  
0.6 V to 0.2 V load  
–25 + (VIN +1) /0.015  
mA  
V/ns  
V/ns  
Slew (r) Output Rise Slew Rate  
Slew (f) Output Fall Slew Rate  
1
1
4
4
2.8  
4.0  
Note: *PCI Local Bus Specification, Version 2.1, Section 4.2.2.2.  
Revision 12  
1-24  
 
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
0.50  
0.45  
0.40  
0.35  
0.30  
0.25  
0.20  
0.15  
0.10  
0.05  
0.00  
PCI IOL Maximum  
MX PCI IOL  
PCI IOL Minimum  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
–0.05  
–0.10  
–0.15  
–0.20  
PCI IOH Maximum  
MX PCI IOH  
PCI IOH Minimum  
Voltage Out (V)  
Figure 1-15 • Typical Output Drive Characteristics (Based Upon Measured Data)  
Junction Temperature (T )  
J
The temperature variable in the Designer software refers to the junction temperature, not the ambient temperature.  
This is an important distinction because the heat generated from dynamic power consumption is usually hotter than the  
ambient temperature. EQ , shown below, can be used to calculate junction temperature.  
Junction Temperature = T + Ta (1)  
EQ 1  
Where:  
Ta = Ambient Temperature  
T = Temperature gradient between junction (silicon) and ambient  
T = ja * P (2)  
P = Power  
ja = Junction to ambient of package. ja numbers are located in Table 1-21 on page 1-26.  
1-25  
Revision 12  
 
 
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Package Thermal Characteristics  
The device junction-to-case thermal characteristic is jc, and the junction-to-ambient air characteristic is ja. The  
thermal characteristics for ja are shown with two different air flow rates.  
The maximum junction temperature is 150C.  
Maximum power dissipation for commercial- and industrial-grade devices is a function of ja.  
A sample calculation of the absolute maximum power dissipation allowed for a TQ176 package at commercial  
temperature and still air is given in EQ 2.  
Max. junction temp. (C) Max. ambient temp. (C) 150C 70C  
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ -------------------------------------  
= 2.86 W  
Maximum Power Allowed =  
=
ja(C/W)  
28C/W  
EQ 2  
The maximum power dissipation for military-grade devices is a function of jc. A sample calculation of the absolute  
maximum power dissipation allowed for CQFP 208-pin package at military temperature and still air is given in EQ 3.  
Max. junction temp. (C) Max. ambient temp. (C) 150C 125C  
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ ----------------------------------------  
= 3.97 W  
Maximum Power Allowed =  
=
jc(C/W)  
6.3C/W  
EQ 3  
Table 1-21 • Package Thermal Characteristics  
ja  
Plastic Packages  
Pin Count  
jc  
Units  
1.0 m/s  
2.5 m/s  
Still Air  
27.8  
26.2  
26.1  
25.6  
20.0  
25.0  
22.5  
24.7  
38.2  
35.3  
18.3  
200 ft/min.  
500 ft/min.  
Plastic Quad Flat Pack  
100  
160  
208  
240  
44  
12.0  
10.0  
8.0  
23.4  
22.8  
22.5  
22.3  
24.5  
21.0  
18.9  
19.9  
31.9  
29.4  
14.9  
21.2  
21.1  
20.8  
20.8  
22.0  
19.4  
17.6  
18.0  
29.4  
27.1  
13.9  
°C/W  
°C/W  
°C/W  
°C/W  
°C/W  
°C/W  
°C/W  
°C/W  
°C/W  
°C/W  
°C/W  
Plastic Quad Flat Pack  
Plastic Quad Flat Pack  
Plastic Quad Flat Pack  
8.5  
Plastic Leaded Chip Carrier  
Plastic Leaded Chip Carrier  
Plastic Leaded Chip Carrier  
Thin Plastic Quad Flat Pack  
Very Thin Plastic Quad Flat Pack  
Very Thin Plastic Quad Flat Pack  
Plastic Ball Grid Array  
16.0  
13.0  
12.0  
11.0  
12.0  
10.0  
3.0  
68  
84  
176  
80  
100  
272  
Ceramic Packages  
Ceramic Quad Flat Pack  
Ceramic Quad Flat Pack  
208  
256  
2.0  
2.0  
22.0  
20.0  
19.8  
16.5  
18.0  
15.0  
°C/W  
°C/W  
Revision 12  
1-26  
 
 
 
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Timing Models  
Predicted  
Routing  
Delays  
Input Delay  
I/O Module  
Internal Delays  
Output Delay  
I/O Module  
tINYL = 0.62 ns  
tIRD2 = 2.59 ns  
Logic Module  
tPD = 1.24 ns  
tDLH = 3.32 ns  
ENHZ = 7.92 ns  
t
t
RD1 = 1.28 ns  
RD2 = 1.80 ns  
tIRD1 = 2.09 ns  
tIRD4 = 3.64 ns  
t
tRD4 = 2.33 ns  
RD8 = 4.93 ns  
tCO = 1.24 ns  
t
IRD8 = 5.73 ns  
t
Array  
Clock  
tCKH = 4.55 ns  
FO = 128  
FMAX = 180 MHz  
Note: Values are shown for 40MX –3 speed devices at 5.0 V worst-case commercial conditions.  
Figure 1-16 • 40MX Timing Model*  
Input Delays  
I/O Module  
Internal Delays  
Predicted  
Routing  
Delays  
Output Delays  
I/O Module  
t
IRD1 = 2.0 ns1  
tINYL = 0.8 ns  
Combinatorial  
Logic Module  
tDLH = 2.5 ns  
t
t
RD1 = 0.7 ns  
RD2 = 1.9 ns  
D
Q
tPD=1.2 ns  
tRD4 = 1.4 ns  
tRD8 = 2.3 ns  
I/O Module  
G
tDLH = 2.5 ns  
Sequential  
t NH = 0.0 ns  
I
Logic Module  
tINSU = 0.3 ns  
tINGL = 1.3 ns  
D
Q
D
G
Q
Comb.  
Logic  
Include  
tRD1 = 0.70 ns  
t
ENHZ = 4.9 ns  
tOUTH = 0.00 ns  
tOUTSU = 0.3 ns  
tGLH = 2.6 ns  
t
t
t
SUD = 0.3 ns  
HD = 0.00 ns  
CO = 1.3 ns  
Array  
Clocks  
FO = 32  
t
CKH = 2.70 ns  
F
MAX = 296 MHz  
tLCO = 5.2 ns (light loads, pad-to-pad)  
Notes:  
1. Input module predicted routing delay  
2. Values are shown for A42MX09 –3 at 5.0 V worst-case commercial conditions.  
Figure 1-17 • 42MX Timing Model  
1-27  
Revision 12  
 
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Predicted  
Routing  
Delays  
Internal Delays  
Input Delays  
Output Delays  
I/O Module  
I/O Module  
tINPY = 1.0 ns  
tIRD1= 2.0 ns  
Combinatorial  
Module  
tDLH = 2.6 ns  
t
RD1 = 0.9 ns  
Q
D
G
tPD=1.3 ns  
tRD2 = 1.3 ns  
RD4 = 2.0 ns  
t
Decode  
Module  
t
INH = 0.0 ns  
tINSU = 0.5 ns  
tINGO = 1.4 ns  
tRDD = 0.3 ns  
t
PDD = 1.6 ns  
I/O Module  
t
DLH = 2.6 ns  
Sequential  
Logic Module  
tRD1 = 0.9 ns  
D
G
Q
D
Q
Comb.  
Logic  
Include  
tENHZ = 5.3 ns  
tLH = 0.00 ns  
tCO = 1.3 ns  
tLSU = 0.5 ns  
tGHL = 2.9 ns  
tSUD = 3.0 ns  
tHD = 0.0 ns  
Quadrant  
Clocks  
t
CKH=3.03 ns1  
F
MAX  
=180 MHz  
Notes:  
1. Load-dependent  
2. Values are shown for A42MX36 –3 at 5.0 V worst-case commercial conditions.  
Figure 1-18 • 42MX Timing Model (Logic Functions Using Quadrant Clocks)  
Revision 12  
1-28  
 
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Input Delays  
I/O Module  
tINPY = 1 .0 ns  
tIRD1 = 2.0 ns  
D
G
Q
Predicted  
Routing  
Delays  
I/O Module  
tDLH = 2.6 ns  
t
t
INSU = 0.5 ns  
INH = 0.0 ns  
tINGO = 1.4 ns  
RD [7:0]  
RDAD [5:0]  
REN  
WD [7:0]  
t
RD1 = 0.9 ns  
WRAD [5:0]  
BLKEN  
D
G
Q
WEN  
WCLK  
RCLK  
tADSU = 1.6 ns  
tADH = 0.0 ns  
WENSU = 2.7 ns  
tBENS = 2.8 ns  
t
ADSU = 1.6 ns  
tADH = 0.0 ns  
RENSU = 0.6 ns  
tRCO = 3.4 ns  
tGHL = 2.9 ns  
LSU = 0.5 ns  
tLH = 0.0 ns  
Array  
Clocks  
t
t
t
FMAX = 167 MHz  
Note: Values are shown for A42MX36 –3 at 5.0 V worst-case commercial conditions.  
Figure 1-19 • 42MX Timing Model (SRAM Functions)  
1-29  
Revision 12  
 
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Parameter Measurement  
E
D
To AC test loads (shown below)  
PAD  
TRIBUFF  
In  
E
E
50% 50%  
50% 50%  
VCCI  
50%  
VOH  
1.5 V  
50%  
VOH  
1.5 V  
1.5 V  
1.5 V  
PAD  
VOL  
PAD  
GND  
PAD  
90%  
10%  
VOL  
tDLH  
tDHL  
tENZL  
tENLZ  
tENHZ  
tENZH  
Figure 1-20 • Output Buffer Delays  
Load 1  
Load 2  
(Used to measure rising/falling edges)  
(Used to measure propagation delay)  
VCCI  
GND  
To the output under test  
R to VCCI for tPLZ / tPZL  
R to GND for tPHZ / tPZH  
R =1 k  
35 pF  
To the output under test  
35 pF  
Figure 1-21 • AC Test Loads  
Y
PA D  
INBUF  
3 V  
1.5 V 1.5 V  
VCCI  
PAD  
0 V  
50%  
Y
GND  
50%  
tINYH  
tINYL  
Figure 1-22 • Input Buffer Delays  
Revision 12  
1-30  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
S
A
B
Y
S, A or B  
Y
50% 50%  
50%  
50%  
t
PLH  
PHL  
t
Y
50%  
50%  
t
PHL  
PLH  
Figure 1-23 • Module Delays  
Sequential Module Timing Characteristics  
D
E
CLK  
Y
PRE  
CLR  
(Positive Edge-Triggered)  
tHD  
D*  
tSUD  
tA  
tWCLKA  
G, CLK  
tSUENA  
tWCLK1  
tHENA  
tCO  
E
Q
tRS  
PRE, CLR  
tWASYN  
Note: *D represents all data functions involving A, B, and S for multiplexed flip-flops.  
Figure 1-24 • Flip-Flops and Latches  
1-31  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Sequential Timing Characteristics  
PA D  
DATA  
IBDL  
G
CLK PA D  
DATA  
G
tINH  
INSU  
tINSU  
tHEXT  
CLK  
tSU EXT  
Figure 1-25 • Input Buffer Latches  
D
G
PAD  
OBDLHS  
D
G
t
OUTSU  
t
OUTH  
Figure 1-26 • Output Buffer Latches  
Revision 12  
1-32  
 
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Decode Module Timing  
A
B
C
D
E
F
Y
H
G
A–G, H  
Y
50%  
tPHL  
tPLH  
Figure 1-27 • Decode Module Timing  
SRAM Timing Characteristics  
Read Port  
Write Port  
WRAD [5:0]  
BLKEN  
WEN  
RDAD [5:0]  
LEW  
RAM Array  
32x8 or 64x4  
(256 Bits)  
REN  
WCLK  
RCLK  
WD [7:0]  
RD [7:0]  
Figure 1-28 • SRAM Timing Characteristics  
Dual-Port SRAM Timing Waveforms  
tRCKHL  
tRCKHL  
WCLK  
tADH  
tADSU  
WD[7:0]  
WRAD[5:0]  
Valid  
tWENSU  
tWENH  
WEN  
tBENSU  
Valid  
tBENH  
BLKEN  
Note: Identical timing for falling edge clock.  
Figure 1-29 • 42MX SRAM Write Operation  
1-33  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
tCKHL  
tRCKHL  
RCLK  
REN  
tRENSU  
tRENH  
tADSU  
Valid  
tADH  
RDAD[5:0]  
tRCO  
tDOH  
Old Data  
New Data  
RD[7:0]  
Note: Identical timing for falling edge clock.  
Figure 1-30 • 42MX SRAM Synchronous Read Operation  
tRDADV  
RDAD[5:0]  
RD[7:0]  
ADDR1  
ADDR2  
tRPD  
tDOH  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Figure 1-31 • 42MX SRAM Asynchronous Read Operation—Type 1 (Read Address Controlled)  
WEN  
tWENSU  
tWENH  
WD[7:0]  
WRAD[5:0]  
BLKEN  
Valid  
tADH  
tADSU  
WCLK  
tRPD  
tDOH  
Old Data  
New Data  
RD[7:0]  
Figure 1-32 • 42MX SRAM Asynchronous Read Operation—Type 2 (Write Address Controlled)  
Revision 12  
1-34  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Predictable Performance: Tight Delay Distributions  
Propagation delay between logic modules depends on the resistive and capacitive loading of the routing tracks, the  
interconnect elements, and the module inputs being driven. Propagation delay increases as the length of routing  
tracks, the number of interconnect elements, or the number of inputs increases.  
From a design perspective, the propagation delay can be statistically correlated or modeled by the fanout (number of  
loads) driven by a module. Higher fanout usually requires some paths to have longer routing tracks.  
The MX FPGAs deliver a tight fanout delay distribution, which is achieved in two ways: by decreasing the delay of the  
interconnect elements and by decreasing the number of interconnect elements per path.  
Microsemi’s patented antifuse offers a very low resistive/capacitive interconnect. The antifuses, fabricated in 0.45 µm  
lithography, offer nominal levels of 100resistance and 7.0 fF capacitance per antifuse.  
MX fanout distribution is also tight due to the low number of antifuses required for each interconnect path. The  
proprietary architecture limits the number of antifuses per path to a maximum of four, with 90 percent of interconnects  
using only two antifuses.  
Timing Characteristics  
Device timing characteristics fall into three categories: family-dependent, device-dependent, and  
design-dependent. The input and output buffer characteristics are common to all MX devices. Internal routing delays  
are device-dependent; actual delays are not determined until after place-and-route of the user's design is complete.  
Delay values may then be determined by using the Designer software utility or by performing simulation with post-  
layout delays.  
Critical Nets and Typical Nets  
Propagation delays are expressed only for typical nets, which are used for initial design performance evaluation.  
Critical net delays can then be applied to the most timing critical paths. Critical nets are determined by net property  
assignment in Microsemi's Designer software prior to placement and routing. Up to 6% of the nets in a design may be  
designated as critical.  
Long Tracks  
Some nets in the design use long tracks, which are special routing resources that span multiple rows, columns, or  
modules. Long tracks employ three and sometimes four antifuse connections, which increase capacitance and  
resistance, resulting in longer net delays for macros connected to long tracks. Typically, up to 6 percent of nets in a  
fully utilized device require long tracks. Long tracks add approximately a 3 ns to a 6 ns delay, which is represented  
statistically in higher fanout (FO=8) routing delays in the data sheet specifications section, shown in Table 1-28 on  
page 1-40.  
Timing Derating  
MX devices are manufactured with a CMOS process. Therefore, device performance varies according to temperature,  
voltage, and process changes. Minimum timing parameters reflect maximum operating voltage, minimum operating  
temperature and best-case processing. Maximum timing parameters reflect minimum operating voltage, maximum  
operating temperature and worst-case processing.  
1-35  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Temperature and Voltage Derating Factors  
Table 1-22 • 42MX Temperature and Voltage Derating Factors  
(Normalized to TJ = 25°C, VCCA = 5.0 V)  
Temperature  
42MX  
Voltage  
–55°C  
0.93  
0.88  
0.85  
0.84  
0.83  
–40°C  
0.95  
0.90  
0.87  
0.86  
0.85  
0°C  
1.05  
1.00  
0.96  
0.95  
0.94  
25°C  
1.09  
1.03  
1.00  
0.97  
0.96  
70°C  
1.25  
1.18  
1.15  
1.12  
1.10  
85°C  
1.29  
1.22  
1.18  
1.14  
1.13  
125°C  
1.41  
1.34  
1.29  
1.28  
1.26  
4.50  
4.75  
5.00  
5.25  
5.50  
1.50  
1.40  
1.30  
1.20  
1.10  
1.00  
0.90  
0.80  
0.70  
0.60  
–55°C  
–40°C  
0°C  
25°C  
70°C  
85°C  
125°C  
4.50  
4.75  
5.00  
Voltage  
5.25  
5.50  
(V)  
Note: This derating factor applies to all routing and propagation delays.  
Figure 1-33 • 42MX Junction Temperature and Voltage Derating Curves  
(Normalized to TJ = 25°C, VCCA = 5.0 V)  
Table 1-23 • 40MX Temperature and Voltage Derating Factors  
(Normalized to TJ = 25°C, VCC = 5.0 V)  
Temperature  
40MX Voltage  
–55°C  
0.89  
0.84  
0.82  
0.80  
0.79  
–40°C  
0.93  
0.88  
0.85  
0.82  
0.82  
0°C  
1.02  
0.97  
0.94  
0.91  
0.90  
25°C  
1.09  
1.03  
1.00  
0.97  
0.96  
70°C  
1.25  
1.18  
1.15  
1.12  
1.10  
85°C  
1.31  
1.24  
1.20  
1.16  
1.15  
125°C  
4.50  
4.75  
5.00  
5.25  
5.50  
1.45  
1.37  
1.33  
1.29  
1.28  
Revision 12  
1-36  
 
 
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
1.50  
1.40  
1.30  
1.20  
1.10  
1.00  
0.90  
0.80  
0.70  
–55°C  
–40°C  
0°C  
25°C  
70°C  
85°C  
125°C  
0.60  
4.50  
4.75  
5.00  
5.25  
5.50  
Voltage  
(V)  
Note: This derating factor applies to all routing and propagation delays  
Figure 1-34 • 40MX Junction Temperature and Voltage Derating Curves  
(Normalized to TJ = 25°C, VCC = 5.0 V)  
Table 1-24 • 42MX Temperature and Voltage Derating Factors  
(Normalized to TJ = 25°C, VCCA = 3.3 V)  
Temperature  
42MX Voltage  
–55°C  
–40°C  
0°C  
1.10  
0.96  
0.92  
25°C  
1.15  
1.00  
0.96  
70°C  
85°C  
1.36  
1.18  
1.13  
125°C  
3.00  
3.30  
3.60  
0.97  
1.00  
1.32  
1.15  
1.10  
1.45  
1.26  
1.21  
0.84  
0.87  
0.81  
0.84  
1.60  
1.50  
1.40  
1.30  
1.20  
1.10  
1.00  
0.90  
0.80  
0.70  
0.60  
0.50  
0.40  
55°C  
40°C  
0°C  
25°C  
70°C  
85°C  
125°C  
3.00  
3.30  
3.60  
Voltage (V)  
Note: This derating factor applies to all routing and propagation delays.  
Figure 1-35 • 42MX Junction Temperature and Voltage Derating Curves  
(Normalized to TJ = 25°C, VCCA = 3.3 V)  
1-37  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-25 • 40MX Temperature and Voltage Derating Factors  
(Normalized to TJ = 25°C, VCC = 3.3 V)  
Temperature  
40MX Voltage  
–55°C  
1.08  
–40°C  
1.12  
0°C  
1.21  
0.96  
0.92  
25°C  
1.26  
1.00  
0.96  
70°C  
1.50  
1.19  
1.14  
85°C  
1.64  
1.30  
1.25  
125°C  
2.00  
3.00  
3.30  
3.60  
0.86  
0.89  
1.59  
0.83  
0.85  
1.53  
2.20  
2.00  
1.80  
1.60  
1.40  
1.20  
1.00  
0.80  
0.60  
55˚C  
40˚C  
0˚C  
25˚C  
70˚C  
85˚C  
125˚C  
3.00  
3.30  
Voltage (V)  
3.60  
Note: This derating factor applies to all routing and propagation delays.  
Figure 1-36 • 40MX Junction Temperature and Voltage Derating Curves  
(Normalized to TJ = 25°C, VCC = 3.3 V)  
Revision 12  
1-38  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
PCI System Timing Specification  
Table 1-26 and Table 1-27 list the critical PCI timing parameters and the corresponding timing parameters for the MX  
PCI-compliant devices.  
PCI Models  
Microsemi provides synthesizable VHDL and Verilog-HDL models for a PCI Target interface, a PCI Target and  
Target+DMA Master interface. Contact your Microsemi sales representative for more details.  
Table 1-26 • Clock Specification for 33 MHz PCI  
PCI  
A42MX24  
A42MX36  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Units  
Min.  
30  
Max.  
Min.  
Max.  
Min.  
Max.  
tCYC  
tHIGH  
tLOW  
CLK Cycle Time  
CLK High Time  
CLK Low Time  
4.0  
1.9  
1.9  
4.0  
1.9  
1.9  
ns  
ns  
ns  
11  
11  
Table 1-27 • Timing Parameters for 33 MHz PCI  
PCI  
A42MX24  
A42MX36  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Units  
Min.  
Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
tVAL  
CLK to Signal Valid—Bused Signals  
2
11  
12  
2.0  
2.0  
2.0  
9.0  
9.0  
4.0  
8.31  
2.0  
2.0  
2.0  
9.0  
9.0  
4.0  
8.31  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tVAL(PTP) CLK to Signal Valid—Point-to-Point  
2 2  
tON  
Float to Active  
Active to Float  
2
tOFF  
tSU  
tSU(PTP)  
tH  
28  
Input Set-Up Time to CLK—Bused Signals  
Input Set-Up Time to CLK—Point-to-Point  
Input Hold to CLK  
7
10, 122  
0
1.5  
1.5  
0
1.5  
1.5  
0
Notes:  
1.  
T
is system dependent. MX PCI devices have 7.4 ns turn-off time, reflection is typically an additional 10 ns.  
OFF  
2. REQ# and GNT# are point-to-point signals and have different output valid delay and input setup times than do bussed  
signals. GNT# has a setup of 10; REW# has a setup of 12.  
1-39  
Revision 12  
 
 
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Timing Characteristics  
Table 1-28 • A40MX02 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 5.0 V Operation)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCC = 4.75 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed  
–2 Speed  
–1 Speed  
Std Speed  
–F Speed  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Logic Module Propagation Delays  
tPD1  
tPD2  
tCO  
tGO  
tRS  
Single Module  
1.2  
2.7  
1.2  
1.2  
1.2  
1.4  
3.1  
1.4  
1.4  
1.4  
1.6  
3.5  
1.6  
1.6  
1.6  
1.9  
4.1  
1.9  
1.9  
1.9  
2.7  
5.7  
2.7  
2.7  
2.7  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Dual-Module Macros  
Sequential Clock-to-Q  
Latch G-to-Q  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Reset-to-Q  
Logic Module Predicted Routing Delays1  
tRD1  
tRD2  
tRD3  
tRD4  
tRD8  
FO = 1 Routing Delay  
FO = 2 Routing Delay  
FO = 3 Routing Delay  
FO = 4 Routing Delay  
FO = 8 Routing Delay  
1.3  
1.8  
2.3  
2.9  
4.9  
1.5  
2.1  
2.7  
3.3  
5.7  
1.7  
2.4  
3.0  
3.7  
6.5  
2.0  
2.8  
3.6  
4.4  
7.6  
2.8  
3.9  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
5.0  
6.1  
10.6  
Logic Module Sequential Timing2  
tSUD  
Flip-Flop (Latch)  
Data Input Set-Up  
3.1  
0.0  
3.1  
3.5  
0.0  
3.5  
4.0  
0.0  
4.0  
4.7  
0.0  
4.7  
6.6  
0.0  
6.6  
ns  
ns  
ns  
3
tHD  
Flip-Flop (Latch)  
Data Input Hold  
tSUENA Flip-Flop (Latch)  
Enable Set-Up  
tHENA  
tWCLKA Flip-Flop (Latch)  
Clock Active Pulse Width  
tWASYN Flip-Flop (Latch)  
Asynchronous Pulse Width  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Enable Hold 0.0  
0.0  
3.8  
0.0  
4.3  
0.0  
5.0  
0.0  
7.0  
ns  
ns  
3.3  
3.3  
4.8  
3.8  
5.6  
4.3  
6.3  
5.0  
7.5  
7.0  
ns  
tA  
Flip-Flop Clock Input Period  
10.4  
ns  
fMAX  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Clock  
Frequency (FO = 128)  
181  
168  
154  
134  
80 MHz  
Input Module Propagation Delays  
tINYH  
tINYL  
Pad-to-Y HIGH  
Pad-to-Y LOW  
0.7  
0.6  
0.8  
0.7  
0.9  
0.8  
1.1  
1.0  
1.5  
1.3  
ns  
ns  
Notes:  
1. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
2. Set-up times assume fanout of 3. Further testing information can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
3. The hold time for the DFME1A macro may be greater than 0 ns. Use the Timer tool from the Designer software to check  
the hold time for this macro.  
4. Delays based on 35pF loading.  
Revision 12  
1-40  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-28 • A40MX02 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 5.0 V Operation) (continued)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCC = 4.75 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed  
–2 Speed  
–1 Speed  
Std Speed  
–F Speed  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Input Module Predicted Routing Delays1  
tIRD1  
tIRD2  
tIRD3  
tIRD4  
tIRD8  
FO = 1 Routing Delay  
FO = 2 Routing Delay  
FO = 3 Routing Delay  
FO = 4 Routing Delay  
FO = 8 Routing Delay  
2.1  
2.6  
3.1  
3.6  
5.7  
2.4  
3.0  
3.6  
4.2  
6.6  
2.2  
3.4  
4.1  
4.8  
7.5  
3.2  
4.0  
4.8  
5.6  
8.8  
4.5  
5.6  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
6.7  
7.8  
12.4  
Global Clock Network  
tCKH  
tCKL  
tPWH  
tPWL  
Input Low to HIGH FO = 16  
4.6  
4.6  
5.3  
5.3  
6.0  
6.0  
7.0  
7.0  
9.8  
9.8  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
FO = 128  
Input High to LOW FO = 16  
FO = 128  
4.8  
4.8  
5.6  
5.6  
6.3  
6.3  
7.4  
7.4  
10.4  
10.4  
Minimum Pulse  
Width HIGH  
FO = 16  
FO = 128 2.4  
2.2  
2.6  
2.7  
2.9  
3.1  
3.4  
3.6  
4.8  
5.1  
Minimum Pulse  
Width LOW  
FO = 16 2.2  
FO = 128 2.4  
2.6  
2.7  
2.9  
3.01  
3.4  
3.6  
4.8  
5.1  
tCKSW Maximum Skew  
FO = 16  
FO = 128  
0.4  
0.5  
0.5  
0.6  
0.5  
0.7  
0.6  
0.8  
0.8  
1.2  
tP  
Minimum Period  
FO = 16  
4.7  
5.4  
5.6  
6.1  
6.3  
7.2  
7.5  
10.0  
10.4  
FO = 128 4.8  
fMAX  
Notes:  
Maximum  
Frequency  
FO = 16  
FO = 128  
188  
181  
175  
168  
160  
154  
139  
134  
83 MHz  
80  
1. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
2. Set-up times assume fanout of 3. Further testing information can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
3. The hold time for the DFME1A macro may be greater than 0 ns. Use the Timer tool from the Designer software to check  
the hold time for this macro.  
4. Delays based on 35pF loading.  
1-41  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-28 • A40MX02 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 5.0 V Operation) (continued)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCC = 4.75 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed  
–2 Speed  
–1 Speed  
Std Speed  
–F Speed  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
TTL Output Module Timing4  
tDLH  
Data-to-Pad HIGH  
3.3  
4.0  
3.8  
4.6  
4.3  
5.2  
5.1  
6.1  
7.2  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tDHL  
Data-to-Pad LOW  
8.6  
tENZH  
tENZL  
tENHZ  
tENLZ  
dTLH  
dTHL  
Enable Pad Z to HIGH  
Enable Pad Z to LOW  
Enable Pad HIGH to Z  
Enable Pad LOW to Z  
Delta LOW to HIGH  
Delta HIGH to LOW  
3.7  
4.3  
4.9  
5.8  
8.0  
4.7  
5.4  
6.1  
7.2  
10.1  
17.1  
12.6  
7.9  
9.1  
10.4  
7.7  
12.2  
9.0  
5.9  
6.8  
0.02  
0.03  
0.02  
0.03  
0.03  
0.03  
0.03  
0.04  
0.04 ns/pF  
0.06 ns/pF  
CMOS Output Module Timing4  
tDLH  
Data-to-Pad HIGH  
3.9  
3.4  
4.5  
3.9  
5.1  
4.4  
6.05  
5.2  
8.5  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tDHL  
Data-to-Pad LOW  
7.3  
tENZH  
tENZL  
tENHZ  
tENLZ  
dTLH  
dTHL  
Notes:  
Enable Pad Z to HIGH  
Enable Pad Z to LOW  
Enable Pad HIGH to Z  
Enable Pad LOW to Z  
Delta LOW to HIGH  
Delta HIGH to LOW  
3.4  
3.9  
4.4  
5.2  
7.3  
4.9  
5.6  
6.4  
7.5  
10.5  
17.0  
12.6  
7.9  
9.1  
10.4  
7.7  
12.2  
9.0  
5.9  
6.8  
0.03  
0.02  
0.04  
0.02  
0.04  
0.03  
0.05  
0.03  
0.07 ns/pF  
0.04 ns/pF  
1. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
2. Set-up times assume fanout of 3. Further testing information can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
3. The hold time for the DFME1A macro may be greater than 0 ns. Use the Timer tool from the Designer software to check  
the hold time for this macro.  
4. Delays based on 35pF loading.  
Revision 12  
1-42  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-29 • A40MX02 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 3.3 V Operation)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCC = 3.0 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed  
–2 Speed  
–1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Logic Module Propagation Delays  
tPD1  
tPD2  
tCO  
tGO  
tRS  
Single Module  
1.7  
3.7  
1.7  
1.7  
1.7  
2.0  
4.3  
2.0  
2.0  
2.0  
2.3  
4.9  
2.3  
2.3  
2.3  
2.7  
5.7  
2.7  
2.7  
2.7  
3.7  
8.0  
3.7  
3.7  
3.7  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Dual-Module Macros  
Sequential Clock-to-Q  
Latch G-to-Q  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Reset-to-Q  
Logic Module Predicted Routing Delays1  
tRD1  
tRD2  
tRD3  
tRD4  
tRD8  
FO = 1 Routing Delay  
FO = 2 Routing Delay  
FO = 3 Routing Delay  
FO = 4 Routing Delay  
FO = 8 Routing Delay  
2.0  
2.7  
3.4  
4.2  
7.1  
2.2  
3.1  
3.9  
4.8  
8.2  
2.5  
3.5  
4.4  
5.4  
9.2  
3.0  
4.1  
4.2  
5.7  
7.3  
8.9  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
5.2  
6.3  
10.9  
15.2 ns  
Logic Module Sequential Timing2  
tSUD  
Flip-Flop (Latch)  
Data Input Set-Up  
4.3  
0.0  
4.9  
0.0  
5.6  
0.0  
6.6  
0.0  
9.2  
0.0  
ns  
ns  
3
tHD  
Flip-Flop (Latch)  
Data Input Hold  
tSUENA  
tHENA  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Enable Set-Up 4.3  
4.9  
0.0  
5.3  
5.6  
0.0  
6.0  
6.6  
0.0  
7.0  
9.2  
0.0  
9.8  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Enable Hold  
0.0  
4.6  
tWCLKA  
Flip-Flop (Latch)  
Clock Active Pulse Width  
tWASYN  
Flip-Flop (Latch)  
Asynchronous Pulse Width  
4.6  
6.8  
5.3  
7.8  
6.0  
8.9  
7.0  
9.8  
ns  
tA  
Flip-Flop Clock Input Period  
10.4  
14.6  
ns  
fMAX  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Clock  
Frequency (FO = 128)  
109  
101  
92  
80  
48 MHz  
Input Module Propagation Delays  
tINYH  
tINYL  
Pad-to-Y HIGH  
Pad-to-Y LOW  
1.0  
0.9  
1.1  
1.0  
1.3  
1.1  
1.5  
1.3  
2.1  
1.9  
ns  
ns  
Notes:  
1. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
2. Set-up times assume fanout of 3. Further testing information can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
3. The hold time for the DFME1A macro may be greater than 0 ns. Use the Timer tool from the Designer software to check  
the hold time for this macro.  
4. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
1-43  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-29 • A40MX02 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 3.3 V Operation) (continued)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCC = 3.0 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed  
–2 Speed  
–1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Input Module Predicted Routing Delays1  
tIRD1  
tIRD2  
tIRD3  
tIRD4  
tIRD8  
FO = 1 Routing Delay  
FO = 2 Routing Delay  
FO = 3 Routing Delay  
FO = 4 Routing Delay  
FO = 8 Routing Delay  
2.9  
3.6  
4.4  
5.1  
8.0  
3.4  
4.2  
3.8  
4.8  
4.5  
5.6  
6.3  
7.8  
9.4  
ns  
ns  
ns  
5.0  
5.7  
6.7  
5.9  
6.7  
7.8  
11.0 ns  
17.3 ns  
9.26  
10.5  
12.6  
Global Clock Network  
tCKH  
tCKL  
tPWH  
tPWL  
tCKSW  
tP  
Input LOW to HIGH FO = 16  
6.4  
6.4  
7.4  
7.4  
8.3  
8.3  
9.8  
9.8  
13.7 ns  
13.7  
FO = 128  
Input HIGH to LOW FO = 16  
FO = 128  
6.7  
6.7  
7.8  
7.8  
8.8  
8.8  
10.4  
10.4  
14.5 ns  
14.5  
Minimum Pulse  
Width HIGH  
FO = 16  
FO = 128  
3.1  
3.3  
3.6  
3.8  
4.1  
4.3  
4.8  
5.1  
6.7  
7.1  
ns  
Minimum Pulse  
Width LOW  
FO = 16  
FO = 128  
3.1  
3.3  
3.6  
3.8  
4.1  
4.3  
4.8  
5.1  
6.7  
7.1  
ns  
Maximum Skew  
FO = 16  
0.6  
0.8  
0.6  
0.9  
0.7  
1.0  
0.8  
1.2  
1.2  
1.6  
ns  
ns  
FO = 128  
Minimum Period  
FO = 16  
6.5  
6.8  
7.5  
7.8  
8.5  
8.9  
10.1  
10.4  
14.1  
14.6  
FO = 128  
fMAX  
Maximum  
Frequency  
FO = 16  
FO = 128  
113  
109  
105  
101  
96  
92  
83  
80  
50 MHz  
48  
TTL Output Module Timing4  
tDLH  
Data-to-Pad HIGH  
Data-to-Pad LOW  
4.7  
5.6  
5.4  
6.4  
6.1  
7.3  
7.2  
8.6  
10.0  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tDHL  
12.0  
11.3  
14.1  
23.9  
17.7  
tENZH  
tENZL  
tENHZ  
tENLZ  
dTLH  
dTHL  
Notes:  
Enable Pad Z to HIGH  
Enable Pad Z to LOW  
Enable Pad HIGH to Z  
Enable Pad LOW to Z  
Delta LOW to HIGH  
Delta HIGH to LOW  
5.2  
6.0  
6.8  
8.1  
6.6  
7.6  
8.6  
10.1  
17.1  
12.6  
0.04  
0.06  
11.1  
8.2  
12.8  
9.5  
14.5  
10.7  
0.04  
0.05  
0.03  
0.04  
0.03  
0.04  
0.06 ns/pF  
0.08 ns/pF  
1. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
2. Set-up times assume fanout of 3. Further testing information can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
3. The hold time for the DFME1A macro may be greater than 0 ns. Use the Timer tool from the Designer software to check  
the hold time for this macro.  
4. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
Revision 12  
1-44  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-29 • A40MX02 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 3.3 V Operation) (continued)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCC = 3.0 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed  
–2 Speed  
–1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
CMOS Output Module Timing4  
tDLH  
Data-to-Pad HIGH  
5.5  
4.8  
6.4  
5.5  
7.2  
6.2  
8.5  
7.3  
11.9  
10.2  
10.2  
14.7  
23.9  
17.7  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tDHL  
Data-to-Pad LOW  
tENZH  
tENZL  
tENHZ  
tENLZ  
dTLH  
dTHL  
Notes:  
Enable Pad Z to HIGH  
Enable Pad Z to LOW  
Enable Pad HIGH to Z  
Enable Pad LOW to Z  
Delta LOW to HIGH  
Delta HIGH to LOW  
4.7  
5.5  
6.2  
7.3  
6.8  
7.9  
8.9  
10.5  
17.1  
12.6  
0.07  
0.04  
11.1  
8.2  
12.8  
9.5  
14.5  
10.7  
0.06  
0.04  
0.05  
0.03  
0.05  
0.03  
0.10 ns/pF  
0.06 ns/pF  
1. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
2. Set-up times assume fanout of 3. Further testing information can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
3. The hold time for the DFME1A macro may be greater than 0 ns. Use the Timer tool from the Designer software to check  
the hold time for this macro.  
4. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
1-45  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-30 • A40MX04 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 5.0 V Operation)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCC = 4.75 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed  
–2 Speed  
–1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Logic Module Propagation Delays  
tPD1  
tPD2  
tCO  
tGO  
tRS  
Single Module  
1.2  
2.3  
1.2  
1.2  
1.2  
1.4  
3.1  
1.4  
1.4  
1.4  
1.6  
3.5  
1.6  
1.6  
1.6  
1.9  
4.1  
1.9  
1.9  
1.9  
2.7  
5.7  
2.7  
2.7  
2.7  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Dual-Module Macros  
Sequential Clock-to-Q  
Latch G-to-Q  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Reset-to-Q  
Logic Module Predicted Routing Delays1  
tRD1  
tRD2  
tRD3  
tRD4  
tRD8  
FO = 1 Routing Delay  
FO = 2 Routing Delay  
FO = 3 Routing Delay  
FO = 4 Routing Delay  
FO = 8 Routing Delay  
1.2  
1.9  
2.4  
2.9  
5.0  
1.6  
2.2  
2.8  
3.4  
5.8  
1.8  
2.5  
3.2  
3.9  
6.6  
2.1  
2.9  
3.7  
4.5  
7.8  
3.0  
4.1  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
5.2  
6.3  
10.9  
Logic Module Sequential Timing2  
tSUD  
Flip-Flop (Latch)  
Data Input Set-Up  
3.1  
0.0  
3.1  
0.0  
3.3  
3.3  
4.8  
3.5  
0.0  
3.5  
0.0  
3.8  
3.8  
5.6  
4.0  
0.0  
4.0  
0.0  
4.3  
4.3  
6.3  
4.7  
0.0  
4.7  
0.0  
5.0  
5.0  
7.5  
6.6  
0.0  
6.6  
0.0  
7.0  
7.0  
10.4  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
3
tHD  
Flip-Flop (Latch)  
Data Input Hold  
tSUENA Flip-Flop (Latch)  
Enable Set-Up  
tHENA  
Flip-Flop (Latch)  
Enable Hold  
tWCLKA Flip-Flop (Latch)  
Clock Active Pulse Width  
tWASYN Flip-Flop (Latch)  
Asynchronous Pulse Width  
tA  
Flip-Flop Clock Input Period  
fMAX  
Flip-Flop (Latch)  
Clock Frequency  
(FO = 128)  
181  
167  
154  
134  
80 MHz  
Input Module Propagation Delays  
tINYH  
tINYL  
Pad-to-Y HIGH  
Pad-to-Y LOW  
0.7  
0.6  
0.8  
0.7  
0.9  
0.8  
1.1  
1.0  
1.5  
1.3  
ns  
ns  
Notes:  
1. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
2. Set-up times assume fanout of 3. Further testing information can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
3. The hold time for the DFME1A macro may be greater than 0 ns. Use the Timer utility from the Designer software to  
check the hold time for this macro.  
4. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
Revision 12  
1-46  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-30 • A40MX04 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 5.0 V Operation) (continued)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCC = 4.75 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed  
–2 Speed  
–1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Input Module Predicted Routing Delays1  
tIRD1  
tIRD2  
tIRD3  
tIRD4  
tIRD8  
FO = 1 Routing Delay  
FO = 2 Routing Delay  
FO = 3 Routing Delay  
FO = 4 Routing Delay  
FO = 8 Routing Delay  
2.1  
2.6  
3.1  
3.6  
5.7  
2.4  
3.0  
3.6  
4.2  
6.6  
2.2  
3.4  
4.1  
4.8  
7.5  
3.2  
4.0  
4.8  
5.6  
8.8  
4.5  
5.6  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
6.7  
7.8  
12.4  
Global Clock Network  
tCKH  
tCKL  
tPWH  
tPWL  
tCKSW  
tP  
Input Low to HIGH FO = 16  
4.6  
4.6  
5.3  
5.3  
6.0  
6.0  
7.0  
7.0  
9.8  
9.8  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
FO = 128  
Input High to LOW FO = 16  
FO = 128  
4.8  
4.8  
5.6  
5.6  
6.3  
6.3  
7.4  
7.4  
10.4  
10.4  
Minimum Pulse  
Width HIGH  
FO = 16  
FO = 128 2.4  
2.2  
2.6  
2.7  
2.9  
3.1  
3.4  
3.6  
4.8  
5.1  
Minimum Pulse  
Width LOW  
FO = 16 2.2  
FO = 128 2.4  
2.6  
2.7  
2.9  
3.01  
3.4  
3.6  
4.8  
5.1  
Maximum Skew  
FO = 16  
0.4  
0.5  
0.5  
0.6  
0.5  
0.7  
0.6  
0.8  
0.8  
1.2  
FO = 128  
Minimum Period  
FO = 16  
4.7  
5.4  
5.6  
6.1  
6.3  
7.2  
7.5  
10.0  
10.4  
FO = 128 4.8  
fMAX  
Maximum  
Frequency  
FO = 16  
FO = 128  
188  
181  
175  
168  
160  
154  
139  
134  
83 MHz  
80  
TTL Output Module Timing4  
tDLH  
Data-to-Pad HIGH  
Data-to-Pad LOW  
3.3  
4.0  
3.8  
4.6  
4.3  
5.2  
5.1  
6.1  
7.2  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tDHL  
8.6  
tENZH  
tENZL  
tENHZ  
tENLZ  
dTLH  
dTHL  
Notes:  
Enable Pad Z to HIGH  
Enable Pad Z to LOW  
Enable Pad HIGH to Z  
Enable Pad LOW to Z  
Delta LOW to HIGH  
Delta HIGH to LOW  
3.7  
4.3  
4.9  
5.8  
8.0  
4.7  
5.4  
6.1  
7.2  
10.1  
17.1  
12.6  
7.9  
9.1  
10.4  
7.7  
12.2  
9.0  
5.9  
6.8  
0.02  
0.03  
0.02  
0.03  
0.03  
0.03  
0.03  
0.04  
0.04 ns/pF  
0.06 ns/pF  
1. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
2. Set-up times assume fanout of 3. Further testing information can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
3. The hold time for the DFME1A macro may be greater than 0 ns. Use the Timer utility from the Designer software to  
check the hold time for this macro.  
4. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
1-47  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-30 • A40MX04 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 5.0 V Operation) (continued)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCC = 4.75 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed  
–2 Speed  
–1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
CMOS Output Module Timing1  
tDLH  
Data-to-Pad HIGH  
3.9  
3.4  
4.5  
3.9  
5.1  
4.4  
6.05  
5.2  
8.5  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tDHL  
Data-to-Pad LOW  
7.3  
tENZH  
tENZL  
tENHZ  
tENLZ  
dTLH  
dTHL  
Notes:  
Enable Pad Z to HIGH  
Enable Pad Z to LOW  
Enable Pad HIGH to Z  
Enable Pad LOW to Z  
Delta LOW to HIGH  
Delta HIGH to LOW  
3.4  
3.9  
4.4  
5.2  
7.3  
4.9  
5.6  
6.4  
7.5  
10.5  
17.0  
12.6  
7.9  
9.1  
10.4  
7.7  
12.2  
9.0  
5.9  
6.8  
0.03  
0.02  
0.04  
0.02  
0.04  
0.03  
0.05  
0.03  
0.07 ns/pF  
0.04 ns/pF  
1. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
2. Set-up times assume fanout of 3. Further testing information can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
3. The hold time for the DFME1A macro may be greater than 0 ns. Use the Timer utility from the Designer software to  
check the hold time for this macro.  
4. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
Revision 12  
1-48  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-31 • A40MX04 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 3.3 V Operation)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCC = 3.0 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed  
–1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Logic Module Propagation Delays  
tPD1  
tPD2  
tCO  
tGO  
tRS  
Single Module  
1.7  
3.7  
1.7  
1.7  
1.7  
2.0  
4.3  
2.0  
2.0  
2.0  
2.3  
4.9  
2.3  
2.3  
2.3  
2.7  
5.7  
2.7  
2.7  
2.7  
3.7  
8.0  
3.7  
3.7  
3.7  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Dual-Module Macros  
Sequential Clock-to-Q  
Latch G-to-Q  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Reset-to-Q  
Logic Module Predicted Routing Delays1  
tRD1  
tRD2  
tRD3  
tRD4  
tRD8  
FO = 1 Routing Delay  
FO = 2 Routing Delay  
FO = 3 Routing Delay  
FO = 4 Routing Delay  
FO = 8 Routing Delay  
1.9  
2.7  
3.4  
4.1  
7.1  
2.2  
3.1  
3.9  
4.8  
8.1  
2.5  
3.5  
4.4  
5.4  
9.2  
3.0  
4.1  
4.2  
5.7  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
5.2  
7.3  
6.3  
8.9  
10.9  
15.2  
Logic Module Sequential Timing2  
tSUD  
Flip-Flop (Latch)  
Data Input Set-Up  
4.3  
5.0  
5.6  
6.6  
9.2  
ns  
3
tHD  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Data Input Hold 0.0  
0.0  
5.0  
0.0  
5.3  
0.0  
5.6  
0.0  
5.6  
0.0  
6.6  
0.0  
7.0  
0.0  
9.2  
0.0  
9.8  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tSUENA  
tHENA  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Enable Set-Up  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Enable Hold  
4.3  
0.0  
4.6  
tWCLKA  
Flip-Flop (Latch)  
Clock Active Pulse Width  
tWASYN  
Flip-Flop (Latch)  
Asynchronous Pulse Width  
4.6  
6.8  
5.3  
7.8  
5.6  
8.9  
7.0  
9.8  
ns  
ns  
tA  
Flip-Flop Clock Input Period  
10.4  
14.6  
fMAX  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Clock Frequency  
(FO = 128)  
109  
101  
92  
80  
48 MHz  
Input Module Propagation Delays  
tINYH  
tINYL  
Pad-to-Y HIGH  
Pad-to-Y LOW  
1.0  
0.9  
1.1  
1.0  
1.3  
1.1  
1.5  
1.3  
2.1  
1.9  
ns  
ns  
Notes:  
1. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
2. Set-up times assume fanout of 3. Further testing information can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
3. The hold time for the DFME1A macro may be greater than 0 ns. Use the Timer tool from the Designer software to check  
the hold time for this macro.  
4. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
1-49  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-31 • A40MX04 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 3.3 V Operation) (continued)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCC = 3.0 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed  
–1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Input Module Predicted Routing Delays1  
tIRD1  
tIRD2  
tIRD3  
tIRD4  
tIRD8  
FO = 1 Routing Delay  
FO = 2 Routing Delay  
FO = 3 Routing Delay  
FO = 4 Routing Delay  
FO = 8 Routing Delay  
2.9  
3.6  
4.4  
5.1  
8.0  
3.3  
4.2  
5.0  
5.9  
9.3  
3.8  
4.8  
4.5  
5.6  
6.3  
7.8  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
5.7  
6.7  
9.4  
6.7  
7.8  
11.0  
17.2  
10.5  
12.4  
Global Clock Network  
tCKH  
tCKL  
tPWH  
tPWL  
tCKSW  
tP  
Input LOW to HIGH FO = 16  
6.4  
6.4  
7.4  
7.4  
8.4  
8.4  
9.9  
9.9  
13.8  
13.8  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
FO = 128  
Input HIGH to LOW FO = 16  
FO = 128  
6.8  
6.8  
7.8  
7.8  
8.9  
8.9  
10.4  
10.4  
14.6  
14.6  
Minimum Pulse  
Width HIGH  
FO = 16  
FO = 128  
3.1  
3.3  
3.6  
3.8  
4.1  
4.3  
4.8  
5.1  
6.7  
7.1  
Minimum Pulse  
Width LOW  
FO = 16  
FO = 128  
3.1  
3.3  
3.6  
3.8  
4.1  
4.3  
4.8  
5.1  
6.7  
7.1  
Maximum Skew  
FO = 16  
0.6  
0.8  
0.6  
0.9  
0.7  
1.0  
0.8  
1.2  
1.2  
1.6  
FO = 128  
Minimum Period  
FO = 16  
6.5  
6.8  
7.5  
7.8  
8.5  
8.9  
10.1  
10.4  
14.1  
14.6  
FO = 128  
fMAX  
Maximum Frequency FO = 16  
FO = 128  
113  
109  
105  
101  
96  
92  
83  
80  
50 MHz  
48  
TTL Output Module Timing4  
tDLH  
Data-to-Pad HIGH  
4.7  
5.6  
5.4  
6.4  
6.1  
7.3  
7.2  
8.6  
10.0  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tDHL  
Data-to-Pad LOW  
12.0  
11.3  
14.1  
23.9  
17.7  
tENZH  
tENZL  
tENHZ  
tENLZ  
dTLH  
dTHL  
Notes:  
Enable Pad Z to HIGH  
Enable Pad Z to LOW  
Enable Pad HIGH to Z  
Enable Pad LOW to Z  
Delta LOW to HIGH  
Delta HIGH to LOW  
5.2  
6.0  
6.9  
8.1  
6.6  
7.6  
8.6  
10.1  
17.1  
12.6  
0.04  
0.06  
11.1  
8.2  
12.8  
9.5  
14.5  
10.7  
0.04  
0.05  
0.03  
0.04  
0.03  
0.04  
0.06 ns/pF  
0.08 ns/pF  
1. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
2. Set-up times assume fanout of 3. Further testing information can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
3. The hold time for the DFME1A macro may be greater than 0 ns. Use the Timer tool from the Designer software to check  
the hold time for this macro.  
4. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
Revision 12  
1-50  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-31 • A40MX04 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 3.3 V Operation) (continued)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCC = 3.0 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed  
–1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
CMOS Output Module Timing4  
tDLH  
Data-to-Pad HIGH  
5.5  
4.8  
6.4  
5.5  
7.2  
6.2  
8.5  
7.3  
11.9  
10.2  
10.2  
14.7  
23.9  
17.7  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tDHL  
Data-to-Pad LOW  
tENZH  
tENZL  
tENHZ  
tENLZ  
dTLH  
dTHL  
Notes:  
Enable Pad Z to HIGH  
Enable Pad Z to LOW  
Enable Pad HIGH to Z  
Enable Pad LOW to Z  
Delta LOW to HIGH  
Delta HIGH to LOW  
4.7  
5.5  
6.2  
7.3  
6.8  
7.9  
8.9  
10.5  
17.1  
12.6  
0.07  
0.04  
11.1  
8.2  
12.8  
9.5  
14.5  
10.7  
0.06  
0.04  
0.05  
0.03  
0.05  
0.03  
0.10 ns/pF  
0.06 ns/pF  
1. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
2. Set-up times assume fanout of 3. Further testing information can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
3. The hold time for the DFME1A macro may be greater than 0 ns. Use the Timer tool from the Designer software to check  
the hold time for this macro.  
4. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
1-51  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-32 • A42MX09 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 5.0 V Operation)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCCA = 4.75 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed –1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Logic Module Propagation Delays1  
tPD1  
tCO  
tGO  
tRS  
Single Module  
1.2  
1.3  
1.2  
1.2  
1.3  
1.4  
1.4  
1.6  
1.5  
1.6  
1.6  
1.8  
1.8  
1.9  
1.8  
2.1  
2.5  
2.7  
2.6  
2.9  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Sequential Clock-to-Q  
Latch G-to-Q  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Reset-to-Q  
Logic Module Predicted Routing Delays2  
tRD1  
tRD2  
tRD3  
tRD4  
tRD8  
FO = 1 Routing Delay  
FO = 2 Routing Delay  
FO = 3 Routing Delay  
FO = 4 Routing Delay  
FO = 8 Routing Delay  
0.7  
0.9  
1.2  
1.4  
2.3  
0.8  
1.0  
1.3  
1.5  
2.6  
0.9  
1.2  
1.5  
1.7  
2.9  
1.0  
1.4  
1.7  
2.0  
3.4  
1.4  
1.9  
2.4  
2.9  
4.8  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Logic Module Sequential Timing3, 4  
tSUD  
Flip-Flop (Latch)  
Data Input Set-Up  
0.3  
0.4  
0.4  
0.5  
0.7  
ns  
tHD  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Data Input Hold  
0.0  
0.4  
0.0  
3.4  
0.0  
0.5  
0.0  
3.8  
0.0  
0.5  
0.0  
4.3  
0.0  
0.6  
0.0  
5.0  
0.0  
0.8  
0.0  
7.0  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tSUENA Flip-Flop (Latch) Enable Set-Up  
tHENA Flip-Flop (Latch) Enable Hold  
tWCLKA Flip-Flop (Latch) Clock Active  
Pulse Width  
tWASYN Flip-Flop (Latch) Asynchronous  
Pulse Width  
4.5  
4.9  
5.6  
6.6  
9.2  
ns  
tA  
Flip-Flop Clock Input Period  
Input Buffer Latch Hold  
Input Buffer Latch Set-Up  
Output Buffer Latch Hold  
3.5  
0.0  
0.3  
0.0  
0.3  
3.8  
0.0  
0.3  
0.0  
0.3  
4.3  
0.0  
0.4  
0.0  
0.4  
5.1  
0.0  
0.4  
0.0  
0.4  
7.1  
0.0  
0.6  
0.0  
0.6  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tINH  
tINSU  
tOUTH  
tOUTSU Output Buffer Latch Set-Up  
fMAX  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Clock Frequency  
268  
244  
224  
195  
117 MHz  
Notes:  
1. For dual-module macros, use t  
+ t  
+ t  
, t + t  
+ t  
, or t  
+ t  
+ t  
, whichever is appropriate.  
SUD  
PD1  
RD1  
PDn CO  
RD1  
PDn  
PD1  
RD1  
2. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
3. Data applies to macros based on the S-module. Timing parameters for sequential macros constructed from C-modules  
can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
4. Set-up and hold timing parameters for the input buffer latch are defined with respect to the PAD and the D input. External  
setup/hold timing parameters must account for delay from an external PAD signal to the G inputs. Delay from an external  
PAD signal to the G input subtracts (adds) to the internal setup (hold) time.  
5. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
Revision 12  
1-52  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-32 • A42MX09 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 5.0 V Operation) (continued)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCCA = 4.75 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed –1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Input Module Propagation Delays  
tINYH  
tINYL  
tINGH  
tINGL  
Pad-to-Y HIGH  
Pad-to-Y LOW  
G to Y HIGH  
G to Y LOW  
1.0  
0.8  
1.3  
1.3  
1.2  
0.9  
1.4  
1.4  
1.3  
1.0  
1.6  
1.6  
1.6  
1.2  
1.9  
1.9  
2.2  
1.7  
2.7  
2.7  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Input Module Predicted Routing Delays2  
tIRD1  
tIRD2  
tIRD3  
tIRD4  
tIRD8  
FO = 1 Routing Delay  
FO = 2 Routing Delay  
FO = 3 Routing Delay  
FO = 4 Routing Delay  
FO = 8 Routing Delay  
2.0  
2.3  
2.5  
2.8  
3.7  
2.2  
2.5  
2.8  
3.1  
4.1  
2.5  
2.9  
3.2  
3.5  
4.7  
3.0  
3.4  
3.7  
4.1  
5.5  
4.2  
4.7  
5.2  
5.7  
7.7  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Global Clock Network  
tCKH Input LOW to HIGH  
tCKL  
FO = 32  
FO = 256  
2.4  
2.7  
2.7  
3.0  
3.0  
3.4  
3.6  
4.0  
5.0  
5.5  
ns  
ns  
FO = 32  
FO = 256  
3.5  
3.9  
3.9  
4.3  
4.4  
4.9  
5.2  
5.7  
7.3  
8.0  
ns  
ns  
Input HIGH to LOW  
Minimum Pulse  
Width HIGH  
FO = 32  
FO = 256  
1.2  
1.3  
1.4  
1.5  
1.5  
1.7  
1.8  
2.0  
2.5  
2.7  
ns  
ns  
tPWH  
tPWL  
tCKSW  
tSUEXT  
tHEXT  
tP  
Minimum Pulse  
Width LOW  
FO = 32  
FO = 256  
1.2  
1.3  
1.4  
1.5  
1.5  
1.7  
1.8  
2.0  
2.5  
2.7  
ns  
ns  
FO = 32  
FO = 256  
0.3  
0.3  
0.3  
0.3  
0.4  
0.4  
0.5  
0.5  
0.6  
0.6  
ns  
ns  
Maximum Skew  
Input Latch  
External Set-Up  
FO = 32  
FO = 256  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
ns  
ns  
Input Latch  
External Hold  
FO = 32  
FO = 256  
2.3  
2.2  
2.6  
2.4  
3.0  
3.3  
3.5  
3.9  
4.9  
5.5  
ns  
ns  
FO = 32  
FO = 256  
3.4  
3.7  
3.7  
4.1  
4.0  
4.5  
4.7  
5.2  
7.8  
8.6  
ns  
ns  
Minimum Period  
FO = 32  
FO = 256  
296  
268  
269  
244  
247  
224  
215  
195  
129 MHz  
117 MHz  
fMAX  
Maximum Frequency  
Notes:  
1. For dual-module macros, use t  
+ t  
+ t  
, t + t  
+ t  
, or t  
+ t  
+ t  
, whichever is appropriate.  
SUD  
PD1  
RD1  
PDn CO  
RD1  
PDn  
PD1  
RD1  
2. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
3. Data applies to macros based on the S-module. Timing parameters for sequential macros constructed from C-modules  
can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
4. Set-up and hold timing parameters for the input buffer latch are defined with respect to the PAD and the D input. External  
setup/hold timing parameters must account for delay from an external PAD signal to the G inputs. Delay from an external  
PAD signal to the G input subtracts (adds) to the internal setup (hold) time.  
5. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
1-53  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-32 • A42MX09 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 5.0 V Operation) (continued)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCCA = 4.75 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed –1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
TTL Output Module Timing5  
tDLH  
tDHL  
tENZH  
tENZL  
tENHZ  
tENLZ  
tGLH  
tGHL  
tLSU  
Data-to-Pad HIGH  
Data-to-Pad LOW  
Enable Pad Z to HIGH  
Enable Pad Z to LOW  
Enable Pad HIGH to Z  
Enable Pad LOW to Z  
G-to-Pad HIGH  
2.5  
2.9  
2.6  
2.9  
4.9  
5.3  
2.6  
2.6  
2.7  
3.2  
2.9  
3.2  
5.4  
5.9  
2.9  
2.9  
3.1  
3.6  
3.3  
3.7  
6.2  
6.7  
3.3  
3.3  
3.6  
4.3  
3.9  
4.3  
7.3  
7.9  
3.8  
3.8  
5.1  
6.0  
5.5  
6.1  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
10.2 ns  
11.1 ns  
5.3  
5.3  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
G-to-Pad LOW  
I/O Latch Set-Up  
0.5  
0.0  
0.5  
0.0  
0.6  
0.0  
0.7  
0.0  
1.0  
0.0  
tLH  
I/O Latch Hold  
tLCO  
I/O Latch Clock-to-Out  
(Pad-to-Pad), 64 Clock Loading  
5.2  
7.4  
5.8  
8.2  
6.6  
9.3  
7.7  
10.8 ns  
tACO  
Array Clock-to-Out  
10.9  
15.3 ns  
(Pad-to-Pad), 64 Clock Loading  
dTLH  
Capacity Loading, LOW to HIGH  
Capacity Loading, HIGH to LOW  
0.03  
0.04  
0.03  
0.04  
0.03  
0.04  
0.04  
0.05  
0.06 ns/pF  
0.07 ns/pF  
dTHL  
Notes:  
1. For dual-module macros, use t  
+ t  
+ t  
, t + t  
+ t  
, or t  
+ t  
+ t  
, whichever is appropriate.  
SUD  
PD1  
RD1  
PDn CO  
RD1  
PDn  
PD1  
RD1  
2. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
3. Data applies to macros based on the S-module. Timing parameters for sequential macros constructed from C-modules  
can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
4. Set-up and hold timing parameters for the input buffer latch are defined with respect to the PAD and the D input. External  
setup/hold timing parameters must account for delay from an external PAD signal to the G inputs. Delay from an external  
PAD signal to the G input subtracts (adds) to the internal setup (hold) time.  
5. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
Revision 12  
1-54  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-32 • A42MX09 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 5.0 V Operation) (continued)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCCA = 4.75 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed –1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
CMOS Output Module Timing5  
tDLH  
tDHL  
tENZH  
tENZL  
tENHZ  
tENLZ  
tGLH  
tGHL  
tLSU  
Data-to-Pad HIGH  
Data-to-Pad LOW  
Enable Pad Z to HIGH  
Enable Pad Z to LOW  
Enable Pad HIGH to Z  
Enable Pad LOW to Z  
G-to-Pad HIGH  
2.4  
2.9  
2.7  
2.9  
4.9  
5.3  
4.2  
4.2  
2.7  
3.2  
2.9  
3.2  
5.4  
5.9  
4.6  
4.6  
3.1  
3.6  
3.3  
3.7  
6.2  
6.7  
5.2  
5.2  
3.6  
4.3  
3.9  
4.3  
7.3  
7.9  
6.1  
6.1  
5.1  
6.0  
5.5  
6.1  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
10.2 ns  
11.1 ns  
8.6  
8.6  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
G-to-Pad LOW  
I/O Latch Set-Up  
0.5  
0.0  
0.5  
0.0  
0.6  
0.0  
0.7  
0.0  
1.0  
0.0  
tLH  
I/O Latch Hold  
tLCO  
I/O Latch Clock-to-Out  
(Pad-to-Pad), 64 Clock Loading  
5.2  
7.4  
5.8  
8.2  
6.6  
9.3  
7.7  
10.8 ns  
tACO  
Array Clock-to-Out (  
10.9  
15.3 ns  
Pad-to-Pad), 64 Clock Loading  
dTLH  
Capacity Loading, LOW to HIGH  
Capacity Loading, HIGH to LOW  
0.03  
0.04  
0.03  
0.04  
0.03  
0.04  
0.04  
0.05  
0.06 ns/pF  
0.07 ns/pF  
dTHL  
Notes:  
1. For dual-module macros, use t  
+ t  
+ t  
, t + t  
+ t  
, or t  
+ t  
+ t  
, whichever is appropriate.  
SUD  
PD1  
RD1  
PDn CO  
RD1  
PDn  
PD1  
RD1  
2. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
3. Data applies to macros based on the S-module. Timing parameters for sequential macros constructed from C-modules  
can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
4. Set-up and hold timing parameters for the input buffer latch are defined with respect to the PAD and the D input. External  
setup/hold timing parameters must account for delay from an external PAD signal to the G inputs. Delay from an external  
PAD signal to the G input subtracts (adds) to the internal setup (hold) time.  
5. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
1-55  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-33 • A42MX09 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 3.3 V Operation)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCCA = 3.0 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed –1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Logic Module Propagation Delays1  
tPD1  
tCO  
tGO  
tRS  
Single Module  
1.6  
1.8  
1.7  
2.0  
1.8  
2.0  
1.9  
2.2  
2.1  
2.3  
2.1  
2.5  
2.5  
2.7  
2.5  
2.9  
3.5  
3.8  
3.5  
4.1  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Sequential Clock-to-Q  
Latch G-to-Q  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Reset-to-Q  
Logic Module Predicted Routing Delays2  
tRD1  
tRD2  
tRD3  
tRD4  
tRD8  
FO = 1 Routing Delay  
FO = 2 Routing Delay  
FO = 3 Routing Delay  
FO = 4 Routing Delay  
FO = 8 Routing Delay  
1.0  
1.3  
1.6  
1.9  
3.2  
1.1  
1.4  
1.8  
2.1  
3.6  
1.2  
1.6  
2.0  
2.4  
4.1  
1.4  
1.9  
2.4  
2.9  
4.8  
2.0  
2.7  
3.3  
4.0  
6.7  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Logic Module Sequential Timing 3, 4  
tSUD  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Data Input Set-Up 0.5  
0.5  
0.0  
0.6  
0.0  
5.3  
0.6  
0.0  
0.7  
0.0  
6.0  
0.7  
0.0  
0.8  
0.0  
7.0  
0.9  
0.0  
1.2  
0.0  
9.8  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tHD  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Data Input Hold  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Enable Set-Up  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Enable Hold  
0.0  
0.6  
0.0  
4.7  
tSUENA  
tHENA  
tWCLKA  
Flip-Flop (Latch)  
Clock Active Pulse Width  
tWASYN  
Flip-Flop (Latch)  
6.2  
6.9  
7.8  
9.2  
12.9  
ns  
Asynchronous Pulse Width  
tA  
Flip-Flop Clock Input Period  
Input Buffer Latch Hold  
5.0  
0.0  
0.3  
0.0  
0.3  
5.6  
0.0  
0.3  
0.0  
0.3  
6.2  
0.0  
0.3  
0.0  
0.3  
7.1  
0.0  
0.4  
0.0  
0.4  
9.9  
0.0  
0.6  
0.0  
0.6  
ns  
ns  
tINH  
tINSU  
tOUTH  
tOUTSU  
fMAX  
Notes:  
Input Buffer Latch Set-Up  
Output Buffer Latch Hold  
Output Buffer Latch Set-Up  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Clock Frequency  
ns  
ns  
ns  
161  
146  
135  
117  
70  
MHz  
1. For dual-module macros, use t  
+ t  
+ t  
, t + t  
+ t  
, or t  
+ t  
+ t  
, whichever is appropriate.  
SUD  
PD1  
RD1  
PDn CO  
RD1  
PDn  
PD1  
RD1  
2. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
3. Data applies to macros based on the S-module. Timing parameters for sequential macros constructed from C-modules  
can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
4. Set-up and hold timing parameters for the input buffer latch are defined with respect to the PAD and the D input. External  
setup/hold timing parameters must account for delay from an external PAD signal to the G inputs. Delay from an external  
PAD signal to the G input subtracts (adds) to the internal setup (hold) time.  
5. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
Revision 12  
1-56  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-33 • A42MX09 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 3.3 V Operation) (continued)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCCA = 3.0 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed –1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Input Module Propagation Delays  
tINYH  
tINYL  
tINGH  
tINGL  
Pad-to-Y HIGH  
Pad-to-Y LOW  
G to Y HIGH  
G to Y LOW  
1.5  
1.2  
1.8  
1.8  
1.6  
1.3  
2.0  
2.0  
1.8  
1.4  
2.3  
2.3  
2.17  
1.7  
2.7  
3.0  
2.4  
3.7  
3.7  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
2.7  
Input Module Predicted Routing Delays2  
tIRD1  
tIRD2  
tIRD3  
tIRD4  
tIRD8  
FO = 1 Routing Delay  
FO = 2 Routing Delay  
FO = 3 Routing Delay  
FO = 4 Routing Delay  
FO = 8 Routing Delay  
2.8  
3.2  
3.5  
3.9  
5.2  
3.2  
3.5  
3.9  
4.3  
5.8  
3.6  
4.0  
4.4  
4.9  
6.6  
4.2  
4.7  
5.2  
5.7  
7.7  
5.9  
6.6  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
7.3  
8.0  
10.8  
Global Clock Network  
tCKH  
Input LOW to HIGH  
FO = 32  
FO = 256  
4.1  
4.5  
4.5  
5.0  
5.1  
5.6  
6.0  
6.7  
8.4  
9.3  
ns  
ns  
tCKL  
Input HIGH to LOW  
FO = 32  
FO = 256  
5.0  
5.4  
5.5  
6.0  
6.2  
6.8  
7.3  
8.0  
10.2  
11.2  
ns  
ns  
tPWH  
tPWL  
tCKSW  
tSUEXT  
tHEXT  
tP  
Minimum Pulse Width FO = 32  
HIGH FO = 256  
1.7  
1.9  
1.9  
2.1  
2.1  
2.3  
2.5  
2.7  
3.5  
3.8  
ns  
ns  
Minimum Pulse Width FO = 32  
1.7  
1.9  
1.9  
2.1  
2.1  
2.3  
2.5  
2.7  
3.5  
3.8  
ns  
ns  
LOW  
FO = 256  
Maximum Skew  
FO = 32  
0.4  
0.4  
0.5  
0.5  
0.5  
0.5  
0.6  
0.6  
0.9  
0.9  
ns  
ns  
FO = 256  
Input Latch External FO = 32  
Set-Up FO = 256  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
ns  
ns  
Input Latch External FO = 32  
3.3  
3.7  
3.7  
4.1  
4.2  
4.6  
4.9  
5.5  
6.9  
7.6  
ns  
ns  
Hold  
FO = 256  
Minimum Period  
FO = 32  
5.6  
6.1  
6.2  
6.8  
6.7  
7.4  
7.8  
8.5  
12.9  
14.2  
ns  
ns  
FO = 256  
fMAX  
Notes:  
Maximum Frequency FO = 32  
FO = 256  
177  
161  
161  
146  
148  
135  
129  
117  
77  
70  
MHz  
MHz  
1. For dual-module macros, use t  
+ t  
+ t  
, t + t  
+ t  
, or t  
+ t  
+ t  
, whichever is appropriate.  
SUD  
PD1  
RD1  
PDn CO  
RD1  
PDn  
PD1  
RD1  
2. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
3. Data applies to macros based on the S-module. Timing parameters for sequential macros constructed from C-modules  
can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
4. Set-up and hold timing parameters for the input buffer latch are defined with respect to the PAD and the D input. External  
setup/hold timing parameters must account for delay from an external PAD signal to the G inputs. Delay from an external  
PAD signal to the G input subtracts (adds) to the internal setup (hold) time.  
5. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
1-57  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-33 • A42MX09 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 3.3 V Operation) (continued)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCCA = 3.0 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed –1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
TTL Output Module Timing5  
tDLH  
tDHL  
tENZH  
tENZL  
tENHZ  
tENLZ  
tGLH  
tGHL  
tLSU  
Data-to-Pad HIGH  
Data-to-Pad LOW  
Enable Pad Z to HIGH  
Enable Pad Z to LOW  
Enable Pad HIGH to Z  
Enable Pad LOW to Z  
G-to-Pad HIGH  
3.4  
4.0  
3.7  
4.1  
6.9  
7.5  
5.8  
5.8  
3.8  
4.5  
4.1  
4.5  
7.6  
8.3  
6.5  
6.5  
4.3  
5.1  
4.6  
5.1  
8.6  
9.4  
7.3  
7.3  
5.1  
6.1  
7.1  
8.3  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
5.5  
7.6  
6.1  
8.5  
10.2  
11.1  
8.6  
14.2  
15.5  
12.0  
12.0  
G-to-Pad LOW  
8.6  
I/O Latch Set-Up  
0.7  
0.0  
0.8  
0.0  
0.9  
0.0  
1.0  
0.0  
1.4  
0.0  
tLH  
I/O Latch Hold  
tLCO  
I/O Latch Clock-to-Out  
(Pad-to-Pad), 64 Clock Loading  
8.7  
9.7  
10.9  
15.4  
12.9  
18.1  
18.0  
25.3  
tACO  
Array Clock-to-Out  
12.2  
13.5  
ns  
(Pad-to-Pad),64 Clock Loading  
dTLH  
Capacity Loading, LOW to HIGH  
Capacity Loading, HIGH to LOW  
0.00  
0.09  
0.00  
0.10  
0.00  
0.10  
0.10  
0.10  
0.01 ns/pF  
0.10 ns/pF  
dTHL  
Notes:  
1. For dual-module macros, use t  
+ t  
+ t  
, t + t  
+ t  
, or t  
+ t  
+ t  
, whichever is appropriate.  
SUD  
PD1  
RD1  
PDn CO  
RD1  
PDn  
PD1  
RD1  
2. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
3. Data applies to macros based on the S-module. Timing parameters for sequential macros constructed from C-modules  
can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
4. Set-up and hold timing parameters for the input buffer latch are defined with respect to the PAD and the D input. External  
setup/hold timing parameters must account for delay from an external PAD signal to the G inputs. Delay from an external  
PAD signal to the G input subtracts (adds) to the internal setup (hold) time.  
5. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
Revision 12  
1-58  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-33 • A42MX09 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 3.3 V Operation) (continued)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCCA = 3.0 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed –1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
CMOS Output Module Timing5  
tDLH  
tDHL  
tENZH  
tENZL  
tENHZ  
tENLZ  
tGLH  
tGHL  
tLSU  
Data-to-Pad HIGH  
Data-to-Pad LOW  
Enable Pad Z to HIGH  
Enable Pad Z to LOW  
Enable Pad HIGH to Z  
Enable Pad LOW to Z  
G-to-Pad HIGH  
3.4  
4.1  
3.7  
4.1  
6.9  
7.5  
5.8  
5.8  
3.8  
4.5  
4.1  
4.5  
7.6  
8.3  
6.5  
6.5  
5.5  
4.2  
4.6  
5.1  
8.6  
9.4  
7.3  
7.3  
6.4  
5.0  
9.0  
7.0  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
5.5  
7.6  
6.1  
8.5  
10.2  
11.1  
8.6  
14.2  
15.5  
12.0  
12.0  
G-to-Pad LOW  
8.6  
I/O Latch Set-Up  
0.7  
0.0  
0.8  
0.0  
0.9  
0.0  
1.0  
0.0  
1.4  
0.0  
tLH  
I/O Latch Hold  
tLCO  
I/O Latch Clock-to-Out  
(Pad-to-Pad), 64 Clock Loading  
8.7  
9.7  
10.9  
15.4  
12.9  
18.1  
18.0  
25.3  
tACO  
Array Clock-to-Out  
(Pad-to-Pad),  
12.2  
13.5  
ns  
64 Clock Loading  
dTLH  
Capacity Loading, LOW to HIGH  
Capacity Loading, HIGH to LOW  
0.04  
0.05  
0.04  
0.05  
0.05  
0.06  
0.06  
0.07  
0.08 ns/pF  
0.10 ns/pF  
dTHL  
Notes:  
1. For dual-module macros, use t  
+ t  
+ t  
, t + t  
+ t  
, or t  
+ t  
+ t  
, whichever is appropriate.  
SUD  
PD1  
RD1  
PDn CO  
RD1  
PDn  
PD1  
RD1  
2. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
3. Data applies to macros based on the S-module. Timing parameters for sequential macros constructed from C-modules  
can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
4. Set-up and hold timing parameters for the input buffer latch are defined with respect to the PAD and the D input. External  
setup/hold timing parameters must account for delay from an external PAD signal to the G inputs. Delay from an external  
PAD signal to the G input subtracts (adds) to the internal setup (hold) time.  
5. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
1-59  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-34 • A42MX16 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 5.0 V Operation)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCCA = 4.75 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed –1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Logic Module Propagation Delays1  
tPD1  
tCO  
tGO  
tRS  
Single Module  
1.4  
1.4  
1.4  
1.6  
1.5  
1.6  
1.5  
1.7  
1.7  
1.8  
1.7  
2.0  
2.0  
2.1  
2.0  
2.3  
2.8  
3.0  
2.8  
3.3  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Sequential Clock-to-Q  
Latch G-to-Q  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Reset-to-Q  
Logic Module Predicted Routing Delays2  
tRD1  
tRD2  
tRD3  
tRD4  
tRD8  
FO = 1 Routing Delay  
FO = 2 Routing Delay  
FO = 3 Routing Delay  
FO = 4 Routing Delay  
FO = 8 Routing Delay  
0.8  
1.0  
1.3  
1.6  
2.6  
0.9  
1.2  
1.4  
1.7  
2.9  
1.0  
1.3  
1.6  
2.0  
3.2  
1.2  
1.5  
1.9  
2.3  
3.8  
1.6  
2.1  
2.7  
3.2  
5.3  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Logic Module Sequential Timing3,4  
tSUD  
Flip-Flop (Latch)  
Data Input Set-Up  
0.3  
0.4  
0.4  
0.5  
0.7  
ns  
tHD  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Data Input Hold  
0.0  
0.7  
0.0  
3.4  
0.0  
0.8  
0.0  
3.8  
0.0  
0.9  
0.0  
4.3  
0.0  
1.0  
0.0  
5.0  
0.0  
1.4  
0.0  
7.1  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tSUENA Flip-Flop (Latch) Enable Set-Up  
tHENA Flip-Flop (Latch) Enable Hold  
tWCLKA Flip-Flop (Latch)  
Clock Active Pulse Width  
tWASYN Flip-Flop (Latch)  
Asynchronous Pulse Width  
4.5  
5.0  
5.6  
6.6  
9.2  
ns  
tA  
Flip-Flop Clock Input Period  
Input Buffer Latch Hold  
Input Buffer Latch Set-Up  
Output Buffer Latch Hold  
6.8  
0.0  
0.5  
0.0  
0.5  
7.6  
0.0  
0.5  
0.0  
0.5  
8.6  
0.0  
0.6  
0.0  
0.6  
10.1  
0.0  
0.7  
0.0  
0.7  
14.1  
0.0  
1.0  
0.0  
1.0  
ns  
ns  
tINH  
tINSU  
tOUTH  
ns  
ns  
tOUTSU Output Buffer Latch Set-Up  
ns  
fMAX  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Clock Frequency  
215  
195  
179  
156  
94  
MHz  
Notes:  
1. For dual-module macros, use t  
appropriate.  
+ t  
+ t  
, t + t  
+ t  
, or t  
+ t  
+ t  
, point and position whichever is  
SUD  
PD1  
RD1  
PDn CO  
RD1  
PDn  
PD1  
RD1  
2. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
3. Data applies to macros based on the S-module. Timing parameters for sequential macros constructed from C-modules  
can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
4. Set-up and hold timing parameters for the input buffer latch are defined with respect to the PAD and the D input. External  
setup/hold timing parameters must account for delay from an external PAD signal to the G inputs. Delay from an external  
PAD signal to the G input subtracts (adds) to the internal setup (hold) time.  
5. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
Revision 12  
1-60  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-34 • A42MX16 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 5.0 V Operation) (continued)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCCA = 4.75 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed –1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Input Module Propagation Delays  
tINYH  
tINYL  
tINGH  
tINGL  
Pad-to-Y HIGH  
Pad-to-Y LOW  
G to Y HIGH  
G to Y LOW  
1.1  
0.8  
1.4  
1.4  
1.2  
0.9  
1.6  
1.6  
1.3  
1.0  
1.8  
1.8  
1.6  
1.2  
2.1  
2.1  
2.2  
1.7  
2.9  
2.9  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Input Module Predicted Routing Delays2  
tIRD1  
tIRD2  
tIRD3  
tIRD4  
tIRD8  
FO = 1 Routing Delay  
FO = 2 Routing Delay  
FO = 3 Routing Delay  
FO = 4 Routing Delay  
FO = 8 Routing Delay  
1.8  
2.1  
2.3  
2.6  
3.6  
2.0  
2.3  
2.6  
3.0  
4.0  
2.3  
2.6  
3.0  
3.3  
4.6  
2.7  
3.1  
3.5  
3.9  
5.4  
4.0  
4.3  
4.9  
5.4  
7.5  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Global Clock Network  
tCKH Input LOW to HIGH FO = 32  
2.6  
2.9  
2.9  
3.2  
3.3  
3.6  
3.9  
4.3  
5.4  
6.0  
ns  
ns  
FO = 384  
tCKL  
Input HIGH to LOW FO = 32  
FO = 384  
3.8  
4.5  
4.2  
5.0  
4.8  
5.6  
5.6  
6.6  
7.8  
9.2  
ns  
ns  
tPWH  
tPWL  
tCKSW  
Minimum Pulse Width FO = 32  
3.2  
3.7  
3.5  
4.1  
4.0  
4.6  
4.7  
5.4  
6.6  
7.6  
ns  
ns  
HIGH  
FO = 384  
Minimum Pulse Width FO = 32  
3.2  
3.7  
3.5  
4.1  
4.0  
4.6  
4.7  
5.4  
6.6  
7.6  
ns  
ns  
LOW  
FO = 384  
Maximum Skew  
FO = 32  
0.3  
0.3  
0.4  
0.4  
0.4  
0.4  
0.5  
0.5  
0.7  
0.7  
ns  
ns  
FO = 384  
tSUEXT Input Latch External FO = 32  
Set-Up FO = 384  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
ns  
ns  
tHEXT  
Input Latch External FO = 32  
2.8  
3.2  
3.1  
3.5  
5.5  
4.0  
4.1  
4.7  
5.7  
6.6  
ns  
ns  
Hold  
FO = 384  
tP  
Minimum Period  
FO = 32  
FO = 384  
4.2  
4.6  
4.67  
5.1  
5.1  
5.6  
5.8  
6.4  
9.7  
10.7  
ns  
ns  
fMAX  
Notes:  
Maximum Frequency FO = 32  
FO = 384  
237  
215  
215  
195  
198  
179  
172  
156  
103 MHz  
94 MHz  
1. For dual-module macros, use t  
appropriate.  
+ t  
+ t  
, t + t  
+ t  
, or t  
+ t  
+ t  
, point and position whichever is  
SUD  
PD1  
RD1  
PDn CO  
RD1  
PDn  
PD1  
RD1  
2. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
3. Data applies to macros based on the S-module. Timing parameters for sequential macros constructed from C-modules  
can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
4. Set-up and hold timing parameters for the input buffer latch are defined with respect to the PAD and the D input. External  
setup/hold timing parameters must account for delay from an external PAD signal to the G inputs. Delay from an external  
PAD signal to the G input subtracts (adds) to the internal setup (hold) time.  
5. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
1-61  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-34 • A42MX16 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 5.0 V Operation) (continued)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCCA = 4.75 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed –1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
TTL Output Module Timing5  
tDLH  
Data-to-Pad HIGH  
Data-to-Pad LOW  
Enable Pad Z to HIGH  
Enable Pad Z to LOW  
Enable Pad HIGH to Z  
Enable Pad LOW to Z  
G-to-Pad HIGH  
2.5  
3.0  
2.7  
3.0  
5.4  
5.0  
2.9  
2.9  
5.7  
2.8  
3.3  
3.0  
3.3  
6.0  
5.6  
3.2  
3.2  
6.3  
3.2  
3.7  
3.4  
3.8  
6.8  
6.3  
3.6  
3.6  
7.1  
3.7  
4.4  
4.0  
4.4  
8.0  
7.4  
4.3  
4.3  
8.4  
5.2  
6.1  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tDHL  
tENZH  
tENZL  
tENHZ  
tENLZ  
tGLH  
5.6  
6.2  
11.2  
10.4  
6.0  
tGHL  
G-to-Pad LOW  
6.0  
tLCO  
I/O Latch Clock-to-Out  
11.9  
(Pad-to-Pad), 64 Clock Loading  
tACO  
Array Clock-to-Out  
8.0  
8.9  
10.1  
11.9  
16.7  
ns  
(Pad-to-Pad), 64 Clock Loading  
dTLH  
Capacitive Loading, LOW to HIGH  
Capacitive Loading, HIGH to LOW  
0.03  
0.04  
0.03  
0.04  
0.03  
0.04  
0.04  
0.05  
0.06 ns/pF  
0.07 ns/pF  
dTHL  
Notes:  
1. For dual-module macros, use t  
appropriate.  
+ t  
+ t  
, t + t  
+ t  
, or t  
+ t  
+ t  
, point and position whichever is  
SUD  
PD1  
RD1  
PDn CO  
RD1  
PDn  
PD1  
RD1  
2. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
3. Data applies to macros based on the S-module. Timing parameters for sequential macros constructed from C-modules  
can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
4. Set-up and hold timing parameters for the input buffer latch are defined with respect to the PAD and the D input. External  
setup/hold timing parameters must account for delay from an external PAD signal to the G inputs. Delay from an external  
PAD signal to the G input subtracts (adds) to the internal setup (hold) time.  
5. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
Revision 12  
1-62  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-34 • A42MX16 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 5.0 V Operation) (continued)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCCA = 4.75 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed –1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
CMOS Output Module Timing5  
tDLH  
Data-to-Pad HIGH  
Data-to-Pad LOW  
Enable Pad Z to HIGH  
Enable Pad Z to LOW  
Enable Pad HIGH to Z  
Enable Pad LOW to Z  
G-to-Pad HIGH  
3.2  
2.5  
2.7  
3.0  
5.4  
5.0  
5.1  
5.1  
5.7  
3.6  
2.7  
3.0  
3.3  
6.0  
5.6  
5.6  
5.6  
6.3  
4.0  
3.1  
3.4  
3.8  
6.8  
6.3  
6.4  
6.4  
7.1  
4.7  
3.6  
4.0  
4.4  
8.0  
7.4  
7.5  
7.5  
8.4  
6.6  
5.1  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tDHL  
tENZH  
tENZL  
tENHZ  
tENLZ  
tGLH  
5.6  
6.2  
11.2  
10.4  
10.5  
10.5  
11.9  
tGHL  
G-to-Pad LOW  
tLCO  
I/O Latch Clock-to-Out  
(Pad-to-Pad), 64 Clock Loading  
tACO  
Array Clock-to-Out  
(Pad-to-Pad), 64 Clock Loading  
8.0  
8.9  
10.1  
0.03  
11.9  
0.04  
16.7  
ns  
dTLH  
Capacitive Loading, LOW to HIGH  
0.03  
0.03  
0.06 ns/pF  
Notes:  
1. For dual-module macros, use t  
appropriate.  
+ t  
+ t  
, t + t  
+ t  
, or t  
+ t  
+ t  
, point and position whichever is  
SUD  
PD1  
RD1  
PDn CO  
RD1  
PDn  
PD1  
RD1  
2. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
3. Data applies to macros based on the S-module. Timing parameters for sequential macros constructed from C-modules  
can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
4. Set-up and hold timing parameters for the input buffer latch are defined with respect to the PAD and the D input. External  
setup/hold timing parameters must account for delay from an external PAD signal to the G inputs. Delay from an external  
PAD signal to the G input subtracts (adds) to the internal setup (hold) time.  
5. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
1-63  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-35 • A42MX16 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 3.3 V Operation)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCCA = 3.0 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed –1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Logic Module Propagation Delays1  
tPD1  
tCO  
tGO  
tRS  
Single Module  
1.9  
2.0  
1.9  
2.2  
2.1  
2.2  
2.1  
2.4  
2.4  
2.5  
2.4  
2.8  
2.8  
3.0  
2.8  
3.3  
4.0  
4.2  
4.0  
4.6  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Sequential Clock-to-Q  
Latch G-to-Q  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Reset-to-Q  
Logic Module Predicted Routing Delays2  
tRD1  
tRD2  
tRD3  
tRD4  
tRD8  
FO = 1 Routing Delay  
FO = 2 Routing Delay  
FO = 3 Routing Delay  
FO = 4 Routing Delay  
FO = 8 Routing Delay  
1.1  
1.5  
1.8  
2.2  
3.6  
1.2  
1.6  
2.0  
2.4  
4.0  
1.4  
1.8  
2.3  
2.7  
4.5  
1.6  
2.1  
2.7  
3.2  
5.3  
2.3  
3.0  
3.8  
4.5  
7.5  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Logic Module Sequential Timing3, 4  
tSUD  
Flip-Flop (Latch)  
Data Input Set-Up  
0.5  
0.5  
0.6  
0.7  
0.9  
ns  
tHD  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Data Input Hold 0.0  
0.0  
1.1  
0.0  
5.3  
0.0  
1.2  
0.0  
6.0  
0.0  
1.4  
0.0  
7.1  
0.0  
2.0  
0.0  
9.9  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tSUENA  
tHENA  
tWCLKA  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Enable Set-Up  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Enable Hold  
1.0  
0.0  
4.8  
Flip-Flop (Latch)  
Clock Active Pulse Width  
tWASYN  
Flip-Flop (Latch)  
6.2  
6.9  
7.9  
9.2  
12.9  
ns  
Asynchronous Pulse Width  
tA  
Flip-Flop Clock Input Period  
Input Buffer Latch Hold  
9.5  
0.0  
0.7  
0.0  
0.7  
10.6  
0.0  
0.8  
0.0  
0.8  
12.0  
0.0  
14.1  
0.0  
19.8  
0.0  
1.4  
0.0  
1.4  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tINH  
tINSU  
tOUTH  
tOUTSU  
fMAX  
Notes:  
Input Buffer Latch Set-Up  
Output Buffer Latch Hold  
Output Buffer Latch Set-Up  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Clock Frequency  
0.9  
1.01  
0.0  
0.0  
0.89  
1.01  
129  
117  
108  
94  
56 MHz  
1. For dual-module macros use t  
+ t  
+ taped, to + t  
+ taped, or t  
+ t  
+ tusk, whichever is appropriate.  
RD1  
PD1  
RD1  
RD1  
PD1  
2. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
3. Data applies to macros based on the S-module. Timing parameters for sequential macros constructed from C-modules  
can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
4. Set-up and hold timing parameters for the input buffer latch are defined with respect to the PAD and the D input. External  
setup/hold timing parameters must account for delay from an external PAD signal to the G inputs. Delay from an external  
PAD signal to the G input subtracts (adds) to the internal setup (hold) time.  
5. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
Revision 12  
1-64  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-35 • A42MX16 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 3.3 V Operation) (continued)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCCA = 3.0 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed –1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Input Module Propagation Delays  
tINYH  
tINYL  
tINGH  
tINGL  
Pad-to-Y HIGH  
Pad-to-Y LOW  
G to Y HIGH  
G to Y LOW  
1.5  
1.1  
2.0  
2.0  
1.6  
1.3  
2.2  
2.2  
1.9  
1.4  
2.5  
2.5  
2.2  
1.7  
2.9  
2.9  
3.1  
2.4  
4.1  
4.1  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Input Module Predicted Routing Delays2  
tIRD1  
tIRD2  
tIRD3  
tIRD4  
tIRD8  
FO = 1 Routing Delay  
FO = 2 Routing Delay  
FO = 3 Routing Delay  
FO = 4 Routing Delay  
FO = 8 Routing Delay  
2.6  
2.9  
3.3  
3.6  
5.1  
2.9  
3.2  
3.6  
4.0  
5.6  
3.2  
3.7  
4.1  
4.6  
6.4  
3.8  
4.3  
4.9  
5.4  
7.5  
5.3  
6.1  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
6.8  
7.6  
10.5  
Global Clock Network  
tCKH  
Input LOW to HIGH FO = 32  
4.4  
4.8  
4.8  
5.3  
5.5  
6.0  
6.5  
7.1  
9.0  
9.9  
ns  
ns  
FO = 384  
tCKL  
Input HIGH to LOW FO = 32  
FO = 384  
5.3  
6.2  
5.9  
6.9  
6.7  
7.9  
7.8  
9.2  
11.0  
12.9  
ns  
ns  
tPWH  
tPWL  
tCKSW  
tSUEXT  
tHEXT  
tP  
Minimum Pulse  
Width HIGH  
FO = 32  
FO = 384  
5.7  
6.6  
6.3  
7.4  
7.1  
8.3  
8.4  
9.8  
11.8  
13.7  
ns  
ns  
Minimum Pulse  
Width LOW  
FO = 32  
FO = 384  
5.3  
6.2  
5.9  
6.9  
6.7  
7.9  
7.8  
9.2  
11.0  
12.9  
ns  
ns  
Maximum Skew  
FO = 32  
FO = 384  
0.5  
2.2  
0.5  
2.4  
0.6  
2.7  
0.7  
3.2  
1.0  
4.5  
ns  
ns  
Input Latch External FO = 32  
Set-Up FO = 384  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
ns  
ns  
Input Latch External FO = 32  
Hold  
3.9  
4.5  
4.3  
4.9  
4.9  
5.6  
5.7  
6.6  
8.0  
9.2  
ns  
ns  
FO = 384  
Minimum Period  
FO = 32  
FO = 384  
7.0  
7.7  
7.8  
8.6  
8.4  
9.3  
9.7  
10.7  
16.2  
17.8  
ns  
ns  
fMAX  
Notes:  
Maximum Frequency FO = 32  
FO = 384  
142  
129  
129  
117  
119  
108  
103  
94  
62 MHz  
56 MHz  
1. For dual-module macros use t  
+ t  
+ taped, to + t  
+ taped, or t  
+ t  
+ tusk, whichever is appropriate.  
RD1  
PD1  
RD1  
RD1  
PD1  
2. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
3. Data applies to macros based on the S-module. Timing parameters for sequential macros constructed from C-modules  
can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
4. Set-up and hold timing parameters for the input buffer latch are defined with respect to the PAD and the D input. External  
setup/hold timing parameters must account for delay from an external PAD signal to the G inputs. Delay from an external  
PAD signal to the G input subtracts (adds) to the internal setup (hold) time.  
5. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
1-65  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-35 • A42MX16 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 3.3 V Operation) (continued)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCCA = 3.0 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed –1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
TTL Output Module Timing5  
tDLH  
Data-to-Pad HIGH  
Data-to-Pad LOW  
Enable Pad Z to HIGH  
Enable Pad Z to LOW  
Enable Pad HIGH to Z  
Enable Pad LOW to Z  
G-to-Pad HIGH  
3.5  
4.1  
3.8  
4.2  
7.6  
7.0  
4.8  
4.8  
8.0  
3.9  
4.6  
4.2  
4.6  
8.4  
7.8  
5.3  
5.3  
8.9  
4.4  
5.2  
4.8  
5.3  
9.5  
8.8  
6.0  
6.0  
10.1  
5.2  
6.1  
7.3  
8.6  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tDHL  
tENZH  
tENZL  
tENHZ  
tENLZ  
tGLH  
5.6  
7.8  
6.2  
8.7  
11.2  
10.4  
7.2  
15.7  
14.5  
10.0  
10.0  
16.7  
tGHL  
G-to-Pad LOW  
7.2  
tLCO  
I/O Latch Clock-to-Out  
11.9  
(Pad-to-Pad), 64 Clock Loading  
tACO  
Array Clock-to-Out  
11.3  
12.5  
14.2  
16.7  
23.3  
ns  
(Pad-to-Pad), 64 Clock Loading  
dTLH  
dTHL  
Capacitive Loading, LOW to HIGH  
Capacitive Loading, HIGH to LOW  
0.04  
0.05  
0.04  
0.05  
0.05  
0.06  
0.06  
0.07  
0.08 ns/pF  
0.10 ns/pF  
CMOS Output Module Timing5  
tDLH  
Data-to-Pad HIGH  
Data-to-Pad LOW  
Enable Pad Z to HIGH  
Enable Pad Z to LOW  
Enable Pad HIGH to Z  
Enable Pad LOW to Z  
G-to-Pad HIGH  
4.5  
3.4  
3.8  
4.2  
7.6  
7.0  
7.1  
7.1  
8.0  
5.0  
3.8  
4.2  
4.6  
8.4  
7.8  
7.9  
7.9  
8.9  
5.6  
4.3  
4.8  
5.3  
9.5  
8.8  
8.9  
8.9  
10.1  
6.6  
5.1  
9.3  
7.1  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tDHL  
tENZH  
tENZL  
tENHZ  
tENLZ  
tGLH  
5.6  
7.8  
6.2  
8.7  
11.2  
10.4  
10.5  
10.5  
11.9  
15.7  
14.5  
14.7  
14.7  
16.7  
tGHL  
G-to-Pad LOW  
tLCO  
I/O Latch Clock-to-Out  
(Pad-to-Pad), 64 Clock Loading  
tACO  
Array Clock-to-Out  
11.3  
12.5  
14.2  
16.7  
23.3  
ns  
(Pad-to-Pad),64 Clock Loading  
dTLH  
Capacitive Loading, LOW to HIGH  
Capacitive Loading, HIGH to LOW  
0.04  
0.05  
0.04  
0.05  
0.05  
0.06  
0.06  
0.07  
0.08 ns/pF  
0.10 ns/pF  
dTHL  
Notes:  
1. For dual-module macros use t  
+ t  
+ taped, to + t  
+ taped, or t  
+ t  
+ tusk, whichever is appropriate.  
RD1  
PD1  
RD1  
RD1  
PD1  
2. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
3. Data applies to macros based on the S-module. Timing parameters for sequential macros constructed from C-modules  
can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
4. Set-up and hold timing parameters for the input buffer latch are defined with respect to the PAD and the D input. External  
setup/hold timing parameters must account for delay from an external PAD signal to the G inputs. Delay from an external  
PAD signal to the G input subtracts (adds) to the internal setup (hold) time.  
5. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
Revision 12  
1-66  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-36 • A42MX24 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 5.0 V Operation)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCCA = 4.75 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed –1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Logic Module Combinatorial Functions1  
tPD  
Internal Array Module Delay  
1.2  
1.4  
1.3  
1.6  
1.5  
1.8  
1.8  
2.1  
2.5  
3.0  
ns  
ns  
tPDD  
Internal Decode Module Delay  
Logic Module Predicted Routing Delays2  
tRD1  
tRD2  
tRD3  
tRD4  
tRD5  
FO = 1 Routing Delay  
FO = 2 Routing Delay  
FO = 3 Routing Delay  
FO = 4 Routing Delay  
FO = 8 Routing Delay  
0.8  
1.0  
1.3  
1.5  
2.4  
0.9  
1.2  
1.4  
1.7  
2.7  
1.0  
1.3  
1.6  
1.9  
3.0  
1.2  
1.5  
1.9  
2.2  
3.6  
1.7  
2.1  
2.6  
3.1  
5.0  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Logic Module Sequential Timing3, 4  
tCO  
Flip-Flop Clock-to-Output  
1.3  
1.2  
1.4  
1.3  
1.6  
1.5  
1.9  
1.8  
2.7  
2.5  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tGO  
Latch Gate-to-Output  
tSUD  
tHD  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Set-Up Time  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Hold Time  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Reset-to-Output  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Enable Set-Up  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Enable Hold  
0.3  
0.0  
0.4  
0.0  
0.4  
0.0  
0.5  
0.0  
0.7  
0.0  
tRO  
1.4  
1.6  
1.8  
2.1  
2.9  
tSUENA  
tHENA  
tWCLKA  
0.4  
0.0  
3.3  
0.5  
0.0  
3.7  
0.5  
0.0  
4.2  
0.6  
0.0  
4.9  
0.8  
0.0  
6.9  
Flip-Flop (Latch)  
Clock Active Pulse Width  
tWASYN  
Flip-Flop (Latch)  
4.4  
4.8  
5.3  
6.5  
9.0  
Asynchronous Pulse Width  
ns  
Input Module Propagation Delays  
tINPY  
tINGO  
tINH  
Input Data Pad-to-Y  
Input Latch Gate-to-Output  
Input Latch Hold  
1.0  
1.3  
1.1  
1.4  
1.3  
1.6  
1.5  
1.9  
2.1  
2.6  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
0.0  
0.5  
4.7  
0.0  
0.5  
5.2  
0.0  
0.6  
5.9  
0.0  
0.7  
6.9  
0.0  
1.0  
9.7  
tINSU  
tILA  
Input Latch Set-Up  
Latch Active Pulse Width  
Notes:  
1. For dual-module macros, use t  
+ t  
+ t  
, t + t  
+ t  
, or t  
+ t  
+ t  
, whichever is appropriate.  
SUD  
PD1  
RD1  
PDn CO  
RD1  
PDn  
PD1  
RD1  
2. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
3. Data applies to macros based on the S-module. Timing parameters for sequential macros constructed from C-modules  
can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
4. Set-up and hold timing parameters for the Input Buffer Latch are defined with respect to the PAD and the D input.  
External setup/hold timing parameters must account for delay from an external PAD signal to the G inputs. Delay from an  
external PAD signal to the G input subtracts (adds) to the internal setup (hold) time.  
5. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
1-67  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-36 • A42MX24 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 5.0 V Operation) (continued)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCCA = 4.75 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed –1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Input Module Predicted Routing Delays2  
tIRD1  
tIRD2  
tIRD3  
tIRD4  
tIRD8  
FO = 1 Routing Delay  
FO = 2 Routing Delay  
FO = 3 Routing Delay  
FO = 4 Routing Delay  
FO = 8 Routing Delay  
1.8  
2.1  
2.3  
2.5  
3.4  
2.0  
2.3  
2.5  
2.8  
3.8  
2.3  
2.6  
2.9  
3.2  
4.3  
2.7  
3.1  
3.4  
3.7  
5.1  
3.8  
4.3  
4.8  
5.2  
7.1  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Global Clock Network  
FO = 32  
FO = 486  
2.6  
2.9  
2.9  
3.2  
3.3  
3.6  
3.9  
4.3  
5.4  
5.9  
ns  
ns  
tCKH  
Input LOW to HIGH  
FO = 32  
FO = 486  
3.7  
4.3  
4.1  
4.7  
4.6  
5.4  
5.4  
6.3  
7.6  
8.8  
ns  
ns  
tCKL  
Input HIGH to LOW  
Minimum Pulse  
Width HIGH  
FO = 32  
FO = 486 2.4  
2.2  
2.4  
2.6  
2.7  
3.0  
3.2  
3.5  
4.5  
4.9  
ns  
ns  
tPWH  
tPWL  
Minimum Pulse  
Width LOW  
FO = 32 2.2  
FO = 486 2.4  
2.4  
2.6  
2.7  
3.0  
3.2  
3.5  
4.5  
4.9  
ns  
ns  
FO = 32  
FO = 486  
0.5  
0.5  
0.6  
0.6  
0.7  
0.7  
0.8  
0.8  
1.1  
1.1  
ns  
ns  
tCKSW  
tSUEXT  
tHEXT  
Maximum Skew  
Input Latch External  
Set-Up  
FO = 32  
FO = 486 0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
ns  
ns  
Input Latch External  
Hold  
FO = 32 2.8  
FO = 486 3.3  
FO = 32 4.7  
FO = 486 5.1  
3.1  
3.7  
3.5  
4.2  
4.1  
4.9  
5.7  
6.9  
ns  
ns  
Minimum Period  
5.2  
5.7  
5.7  
6.2  
6.5  
7.1  
10.9  
11.9  
ns  
ns  
tP  
(1/fMAX  
)
Notes:  
1. For dual-module macros, use t  
+ t  
+ t  
, t + t  
+ t  
, or t  
+ t  
+ t  
, whichever is appropriate.  
SUD  
PD1  
RD1  
PDn CO  
RD1  
PDn  
PD1  
RD1  
2. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
3. Data applies to macros based on the S-module. Timing parameters for sequential macros constructed from C-modules  
can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
4. Set-up and hold timing parameters for the Input Buffer Latch are defined with respect to the PAD and the D input.  
External setup/hold timing parameters must account for delay from an external PAD signal to the G inputs. Delay from an  
external PAD signal to the G input subtracts (adds) to the internal setup (hold) time.  
5. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
Revision 12  
1-68  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-36 • A42MX24 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 5.0 V Operation) (continued)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCCA = 4.75 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed –1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
TTL Output Module Timing5  
tDLH  
tDHL  
tENZH  
tENZL  
tENHZ  
tENLZ  
tGLH  
tGHL  
tLSU  
Data-to-Pad HIGH  
Data-to-Pad LOW  
2.4  
2.8  
2.5  
2.8  
5.2  
4.8  
2.9  
2.9  
2.7  
3.2  
2.8  
3.1  
5.7  
5.3  
3.2  
3.2  
3.1  
3.6  
3.2  
3.5  
6.5  
6.0  
3.6  
3.6  
3.6  
4.2  
3.8  
4.2  
7.6  
7.1  
4.3  
4.3  
5.1  
5.9  
5.3  
5.9  
10.7  
9.9  
6.0  
6.0  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Enable Pad Z to HIGH  
Enable Pad Z to LOW  
Enable Pad HIGH to Z  
Enable Pad LOW to Z  
G-to-Pad HIGH  
G-to-Pad LOW  
I/O Latch Output Set-Up  
I/O Latch Output Hold  
0.5  
0.0  
0.5  
0.0  
0.6  
0.0  
0.7  
0.0  
1.0  
0.0  
tLH  
tLCO  
I/O Latch Clock-to-Out  
(Pad-to-Pad) 32 I/O  
5.6  
6.1  
6.9  
8.1  
11.4  
22.0  
tACO  
Array Latch Clock-to-Out  
(Pad-to-Pad) 32 I/O  
10.6  
11.8  
13.4  
15.7  
ns  
dTLH  
Capacitive Loading, LOW to HIGH  
Capacitive Loading, HIGH to LOW  
0.04  
0.03  
0.04  
0.03  
0.04  
0.03  
0.05  
0.04  
0.07 ns/pF  
0.06 ns/pF  
dTHL  
Notes:  
1. For dual-module macros, use t  
+ t  
+ t  
, t + t  
+ t  
, or t  
+ t  
+ t  
, whichever is appropriate.  
SUD  
PD1  
RD1  
PDn CO  
RD1  
PDn  
PD1  
RD1  
2. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
3. Data applies to macros based on the S-module. Timing parameters for sequential macros constructed from C-modules  
can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
4. Set-up and hold timing parameters for the Input Buffer Latch are defined with respect to the PAD and the D input.  
External setup/hold timing parameters must account for delay from an external PAD signal to the G inputs. Delay from an  
external PAD signal to the G input subtracts (adds) to the internal setup (hold) time.  
5. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
1-69  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-36 • A42MX24 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 5.0 V Operation) (continued)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCCA = 4.75 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed –1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
CMOS Output Module Timing5  
tDLH  
tDHL  
tENZH  
tENZL  
tENHZ  
tENLZ  
tGLH  
tGHL  
tLSU  
Data-to-Pad HIGH  
Data-to-Pad LOW  
Enable Pad Z to HIGH  
Enable Pad Z to LOW  
Enable Pad HIGH to Z  
Enable Pad LOW to Z  
G-to-Pad HIGH  
3.1  
2.4  
2.5  
2.8  
5.2  
4.8  
4.9  
4.9  
3.5  
2.6  
2.8  
3.1  
5.7  
5.3  
5.4  
5.4  
3.9  
3.0  
3.2  
3.5  
6.5  
6.0  
6.2  
6.2  
4.6  
3.5  
3.8  
4.2  
7.6  
7.1  
7.2  
7.2  
6.4  
4.9  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
5.3  
5.8  
10.7  
9.9  
10.1  
10.1  
G-to-Pad LOW  
I/O Latch Set-Up  
0.5  
0.0  
0.5  
0.0  
0.6  
0.0  
0.7  
0.0  
1.0  
0.0  
tLH  
I/O Latch Hold  
tLCO  
I/O Latch Clock-to-Out  
(Pad-to-Pad) 32 I/O  
5.5  
6.1  
6.9  
8.1  
11.3  
22.0  
tACO  
Array Latch Clock-to-Out  
(Pad-to-Pad) 32 I/O  
10.6  
11.8  
13.4  
15.7  
ns  
dTLH  
Capacitive Loading, LOW to HIGH  
Capacitive Loading, HIGH to LOW  
0.04  
0.03  
0.04  
0.03  
0.04  
0.03  
0.05  
0.04  
0.07 ns/pF  
0.06 ns/pF  
dTHL  
Notes:  
1. For dual-module macros, use t  
+ t  
+ t  
, t + t  
+ t  
, or t  
+ t  
+ t  
, whichever is appropriate.  
SUD  
PD1  
RD1  
PDn CO  
RD1  
PDn  
PD1  
RD1  
2. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
3. Data applies to macros based on the S-module. Timing parameters for sequential macros constructed from C-modules  
can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
4. Set-up and hold timing parameters for the Input Buffer Latch are defined with respect to the PAD and the D input.  
External setup/hold timing parameters must account for delay from an external PAD signal to the G inputs. Delay from an  
external PAD signal to the G input subtracts (adds) to the internal setup (hold) time.  
5. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
Revision 12  
1-70  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-37 • A42MX24 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 3.3 V Operation)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCCA = 3.0 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed –1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Logic Module Combinatorial Functions1  
tPD  
Internal Array Module Delay  
2.0  
1.1  
1.8  
2.2  
2.1  
2.5  
2.5  
3.0  
3.4  
4.2  
ns  
ns  
tPDD  
Internal Decode Module Delay  
Logic Module Predicted Routing Delays2  
tRD1  
tRD2  
tRD3  
tRD4  
tRD5  
FO = 1 Routing Delay  
FO = 2 Routing Delay  
FO = 3 Routing Delay  
FO = 4 Routing Delay  
FO = 8 Routing Delay  
1.7  
2.0  
1.1  
1.5  
1.8  
1.3  
1.6  
2.0  
2.3  
3.7  
1.4  
1.8  
2.2  
2.6  
4.2  
1.7  
2.1  
2.6  
3.1  
5.0  
2.3  
3.0  
3.7  
4.3  
7.0  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Logic Module Sequential Timing3, 4  
tCO  
Flip-Flop Clock-to-Output  
2.1  
3.4  
2.0  
1.9  
2.3  
2.1  
2.7  
2.5  
3.7  
3.4  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tGO  
Latch Gate-to-Output  
tSUD  
tHD  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Set-Up Time  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Hold Time  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Reset-to-Output  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Enable Set-Up  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Enable Hold  
0.4  
0.0  
0.5  
0.0  
0.6  
0.0  
0.7  
0.0  
0.9  
0.0  
tRO  
2.0  
2.2  
2.5  
2.9  
4.1  
tSUENA  
tHENA  
tWCLKA  
0.6  
0.0  
4.6  
0.6  
0.0  
5.2  
0.7  
0.0  
5.8  
0.8  
0.0  
6.9  
1.2  
0.0  
9.6  
Flip-Flop (Latch)  
Clock Active Pulse Width  
tWASYN  
Flip-Flop (Latch)  
6.1  
6.8  
7.7  
9.0  
12.6  
Asynchronous Pulse Width  
ns  
Input Module Propagation Delays  
tINPY  
tINGO  
tINH  
Input Data Pad-to-Y  
Input Latch Gate-to-Output  
Input Latch Hold  
1.4  
1.8  
1.6  
1.9  
1.8  
2.2  
2.2  
2.6  
3.0  
3.6  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
0.0  
0.7  
6.5  
0.0  
0.7  
7.3  
0.0  
0.8  
8.2  
0.0  
1.0  
9.7  
0.0  
1.4  
tINSU  
tILA  
Input Latch Set-Up  
Latch Active Pulse Width  
13.5  
Notes:  
1. For dual-module macros, use t  
+ t  
+ t  
, t + t  
+ t  
, or t  
+ t  
+ t  
, whichever is appropriate.  
SUD  
PD1  
RD1  
PDn CO  
RD1  
PDn  
PD1  
RD1  
2. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
3. Data applies to macros based on the S-module. Timing parameters for sequential macros constructed from C-modules  
can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
4. Set-up and hold timing parameters for the Input Buffer Latch are defined with respect to the PAD and the D input.  
External setup/hold timing parameters must account for delay from an external PAD signal to the G inputs. Delay from an  
external PAD signal to the G input subtracts (adds) to the internal setup (hold) time.  
5. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
1-71  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-37 • A42MX24 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 3.3 V Operation) (continued)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCCA = 3.0 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed –1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Input Module Predicted Routing Delays2  
tIRD1  
tIRD2  
tIRD3  
tIRD4  
tIRD8  
FO = 1 Routing Delay  
FO = 2 Routing Delay  
FO = 3 Routing Delay  
FO = 4 Routing Delay  
FO = 8 Routing Delay  
2.6  
2.9  
3.2  
3.5  
4.8  
2.9  
3.2  
3.6  
3.9  
5.3  
3.2  
3.6  
4.0  
4.4  
6.1  
3.8  
4.3  
4.8  
5.2  
7.1  
5.3  
6.0  
6.6  
7.3  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
10.0 ns  
Global Clock Network  
tCKH  
Input LOW to HIGH  
FO = 32  
FO = 486  
4.4  
4.8  
4.8  
5.3  
5.5  
6.0  
6.5  
7.1  
9.1  
10.0 ns  
ns  
tCKL  
Input HIGH to LOW  
FO = 32  
FO = 486  
5.1  
6.0  
5.7  
6.6  
6.4  
7.5  
7.6  
8.8  
10.6 ns  
12.4 ns  
tPWH  
tPWL  
tCKSW  
tSUEXT  
Minimum Pulse  
Width HIGH  
FO = 32  
FO = 486  
3.0  
3.3  
3.3  
3.7  
3.8  
4.2  
4.5  
4.9  
6.3  
6.9  
ns  
ns  
Minimum Pulse  
Width LOW  
FO = 32  
FO = 486  
3.0  
3.3  
3.4  
3.7  
3.8  
4.2  
4.5  
4.9  
6.3  
6.9  
ns  
ns  
Maximum Skew  
FO = 32  
FO = 486  
0.8  
0.8  
0.8  
0.8  
1.0  
1.0  
1.1  
1.1  
1.6  
1.6  
ns  
ns  
Input Latch External FO = 32  
Set-Up FO = 486  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
ns  
ns  
TTL Output Module Timing5  
tDLH  
Data-to-Pad HIGH  
Data-to-Pad LOW  
3.4  
4.0  
3.6  
3.9  
7.2  
6.7  
4.8  
4.8  
3.8  
4.4  
4.0  
4.4  
8.0  
7.5  
5.3  
5.3  
4.3  
5.0  
4.5  
5.0  
9.1  
8.5  
6.0  
6.0  
5.0  
5.9  
5.3  
5.8  
10.7  
9.9  
7.2  
7.2  
7.1  
8.3  
7.4  
8.2  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tDHL  
tENZH  
tENZL  
tENHZ  
tENLZ  
tGLH  
Enable Pad Z to HIGH  
Enable Pad Z to LOW  
Enable Pad HIGH to Z  
Enable Pad LOW to Z  
G-to-Pad HIGH  
14.9 ns  
13.9 ns  
10.0 ns  
10.0 ns  
ns  
tGHL  
G-to-Pad LOW  
tLSU  
I/O Latch Output Set-Up  
0.7  
0.7  
0.8  
1.0  
1.4  
Notes:  
1. For dual-module macros, use t  
+ t  
+ t  
, t + t  
+ t  
, or t  
+ t  
+ t  
, whichever is appropriate.  
SUD  
PD1  
RD1  
PDn CO  
RD1  
PDn  
PD1  
RD1  
2. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
3. Data applies to macros based on the S-module. Timing parameters for sequential macros constructed from C-modules  
can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
4. Set-up and hold timing parameters for the Input Buffer Latch are defined with respect to the PAD and the D input.  
External setup/hold timing parameters must account for delay from an external PAD signal to the G inputs. Delay from an  
external PAD signal to the G input subtracts (adds) to the internal setup (hold) time.  
5. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
Revision 12  
1-72  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-37 • A42MX24 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 3.3 V Operation) (continued)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCCA = 3.0 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed –1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
TTL Output Module Timing5 (continued)  
tLH  
I/O Latch Output Hold  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
ns  
tLCO  
I/O Latch Clock-to-Out  
(Pad-to-Pad) 32 I/O  
7.7  
8.5  
9.6  
11.3  
22.0  
15.9 ns  
tACO  
Array Latch Clock-to-Out  
(Pad-to-Pad) 32 I/O  
14.8  
16.5  
18.7  
30.8 ns  
dTLH  
dTHL  
Capacitive Loading, LOW to HIGH  
Capacitive Loading, HIGH to LOW  
0.05  
0.04  
0.05  
0.04  
0.06  
0.05  
0.07  
0.06  
0.10 ns/pF  
0.08 ns/pF  
CMOS Output Module Timing5  
tDLH  
tDHL  
tENZH  
tENZL  
tENHZ  
tENLZ  
tGLH  
tGHL  
tLSU  
Data-to-Pad HIGH  
Data-to-Pad LOW  
Enable Pad Z to HIGH  
Enable Pad Z to LOW  
Enable Pad HIGH to Z  
Enable Pad LOW to Z  
G-to-Pad HIGH  
4.8  
3.5  
3.6  
3.4  
7.2  
6.7  
6.8  
6.8  
5.3  
3.9  
4.0  
4.0  
8.0  
7.5  
7.6  
7.6  
5.5  
4.1  
4.5  
5.0  
9.0  
8.5  
8.6  
8.6  
6.4  
4.9  
9.0  
6.8  
7.4  
8.2  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
5.3  
5.8  
10.7  
9.9  
14.9 ns  
13.9 ns  
14.2 ns  
14.2 ns  
ns  
10.1  
10.1  
G-to-Pad LOW  
I/O Latch Set-Up  
0.7  
0.0  
0.7  
0.0  
0.8  
0.0  
1.0  
0.0  
1.4  
0.0  
tLH  
I/O Latch Hold  
ns  
tLCO  
I/O Latch Clock-to-Out  
(Pad-to-Pad) 32 I/O  
7.7  
8.5  
9.6  
11.3  
22.0  
15.9 ns  
tACO  
Array Latch Clock-to-Out  
(Pad-to-Pad) 32 I/O  
14.8  
16.5  
18.7  
30.8 ns  
dTLH  
dTHL  
tHEXT  
Capacitive Loading, LOW to HIGH  
Capacitive Loading, HIGH to LOW  
Input Latch External FO = 32  
0.05  
0.04  
0.05  
0.04  
0.06  
0.05  
0.07  
0.06  
0.10 ns/pF  
0.08 ns/pF  
3.9  
4.6  
4.3  
5.2  
4.9  
5.8  
5.7  
6.9  
8.1  
9.6  
ns  
ns  
Hold  
FO = 486  
tP  
Minimum Period  
FO = 32  
FO = 486  
7.8  
8.6  
8.7  
9.5  
9.5  
10.4  
10.8  
11.9  
18.2  
19.9  
ns  
ns  
(1/fMAX  
)
Notes:  
1. For dual-module macros, use t  
+ t  
+ t  
, t + t  
+ t  
, or t  
+ t  
+ t  
, whichever is appropriate.  
SUD  
PD1  
RD1  
PDn CO  
RD1  
PDn  
PD1  
RD1  
2. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
3. Data applies to macros based on the S-module. Timing parameters for sequential macros constructed from C-modules  
can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
4. Set-up and hold timing parameters for the Input Buffer Latch are defined with respect to the PAD and the D input.  
External setup/hold timing parameters must account for delay from an external PAD signal to the G inputs. Delay from an  
external PAD signal to the G input subtracts (adds) to the internal setup (hold) time.  
5. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
1-73  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-38 • A42MX36 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 5.0 V Operation)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCCA = 4.75 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed –1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Logic Module Combinatorial Functions1  
tPD  
Internal Array Module Delay  
1.3  
1.6  
1.5  
1.8  
1.7  
2.0  
2.0  
2.4  
2.7  
3.3  
ns  
ns  
tPDD  
Internal Decode Module Delay  
Logic Module Predicted Routing Delays2  
tRD1  
tRD2  
tRD3  
tRD4  
tRD5  
tRDD  
FO = 1 Routing Delay  
FO = 2 Routing Delay  
FO =3 Routing Delay  
0.9  
1.3  
1.6  
2.0  
3.3  
0.3  
1.0  
1.4  
1.8  
2.2  
3.7  
0.4  
1.2  
1.6  
2.0  
2.5  
4.2  
0.4  
1.4  
1.9  
2.4  
2.9  
4.9  
0.5  
2.0  
2.7  
3.4  
4.1  
6.9  
0.7  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
FO = 4 Routing Delay  
FO = 8 Routing Delay  
Decode-to-Output Routing Delay  
Logic Module Sequential Timing3, 4  
tCO  
tGO  
tSUD  
tHD  
tRO  
Flip-Flop Clock-to-Output  
Latch Gate-to-Output  
1.3  
1.3  
1.4  
1.4  
1.6  
1.6  
1.9  
1.9  
2.7  
2.7  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Set-Up Time  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Hold Time  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Reset-to-Output  
0.3  
0.0  
0.3  
0.0  
0.4  
0.0  
0.5  
0.0  
0.7  
0.0  
1.6  
1.7  
2.0  
2.3  
3.2  
tSUENA Flip-Flop (Latch) Enable Set-Up  
tHENA Flip-Flop (Latch) Enable Hold  
0.7  
0.0  
0.8  
0.0  
3.7  
0.9  
0.0  
4.2  
1.0  
0.0  
4.9  
1.4  
0.0  
6.9  
tWCLKA Flip-Flop (Latch) Clock Active 3.3  
Pulse Width  
tWASYN Flip-Flop (Latch) Asynchronous 4.4  
Pulse Width  
4.8  
5.5  
6.4  
9.0  
ns  
Synchronous SRAM Operations  
tRC  
Read Cycle Time  
6.8  
6.8  
3.4  
7.5  
7.5  
3.8  
8.5  
8.5  
4.3  
10.0  
10.0  
5.0  
14.0  
14.0  
7.0  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tWC  
Write Cycle Time  
tRCKHL  
tRCO  
tADSU  
Clock HIGH/LOW Time  
Data Valid After Clock HIGH/LOW  
Address/Data Set-Up Time  
3.4  
3.8  
4.3  
5.0  
7.0  
1.6  
1.8  
0.0  
2.0  
0.0  
2.4  
0.0  
3.4  
0.0  
Synchronous SRAM Operations (continued)  
tADH  
Address/Data Hold Time  
0.0  
ns  
Notes:  
1. For dual-module macros, use t  
+ t  
+ t  
, t + t  
+ t  
, or t  
+ t  
+ t  
, whichever is appropriate.  
SUD  
PD1  
RD1  
PDn CO  
RD1  
PDn  
PD1  
RD1  
2. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
3. Data applies to macros based on the S-module. Timing parameters for sequential macros constructed from C-modules  
can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
4. Set-up and hold timing parameters for the Input Buffer Latch are defined with respect to the PAD and the D input.  
External setup/hold timing parameters must account for delay from an external PAD signal to the G inputs. Delay from an  
external PAD signal to the G input subtracts (adds) to the internal setup (hold) time.  
5. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
Revision 12  
1-74  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-38 • A42MX36 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 5.0 V Operation)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCCA = 4.75 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed –1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
tRENSU Read Enable Set-Up  
0.6  
3.4  
2.7  
0.0  
2.8  
0.0  
0.7  
3.8  
3.0  
0.0  
3.1  
0.0  
0.8  
4.3  
3.4  
0.0  
3.5  
0.0  
0.9  
5.0  
4.0  
0.0  
4.1  
0.0  
1.3  
7.0  
5.6  
0.0  
5.7  
0.0  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tRENH  
Read Enable Hold  
tWENSU Write Enable Set-Up  
tWENH  
tBENS  
tBENH  
Write Enable Hold  
Block Enable Set-Up  
Block Enable Hold  
Asynchronous SRAM Operations  
tRPD Asynchronous Access Time  
tRDADV Read Address Valid  
tADSU Address/Data Set-Up Time  
tADH Address/Data Hold Time  
8.1  
9.0  
10.2  
12.0  
16.8  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
8.8  
1.6  
0.0  
9.8  
1.8  
0.0  
0.7  
11.1  
2.0  
0.0  
0.8  
13.0  
2.4  
18.2  
3.4  
0.0  
0.0  
tRENSUA Read Enable Set-Up to Address 0.6  
Valid  
0.9  
1.3  
tRENHA Read Enable Hold  
tWENSU Write Enable Set-Up  
3.4  
2.7  
0.0  
3.8  
3.0  
0.0  
4.3  
3.4  
0.0  
5.0  
4.0  
0.0  
7.0  
5.6  
0.0  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tWENH  
tDOH  
Write Enable Hold  
Data Out Hold Time  
1.2  
1.3  
1.5  
1.8  
2.5  
Input Module Propagation Delays  
tINPY  
tINGO  
tINH  
Input Data Pad-to-Y  
Input Latch Gate-to-Output  
Input Latch Hold  
1.0  
1.4  
1.1  
1.6  
1.3  
1.8  
1.5  
2.1  
2.1  
2.9  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
0.0  
0.5  
4.7  
0.0  
0.5  
5.2  
0.0  
0.6  
5.9  
0.0  
0.7  
6.9  
0.0  
1.0  
9.7  
tINSU  
tILA  
Input Latch Set-Up  
Latch Active Pulse Width  
Input Module Predicted Routing Delays2  
tIRD1  
tIRD2  
tIRD3  
tIRD4  
tIRD8  
Notes:  
FO = 1 Routing Delay  
FO = 2 Routing Delay  
FO = 3 Routing Delay  
FO = 4 Routing Delay  
FO = 8 Routing Delay  
2.0  
2.3  
2.6  
3.0  
4.3  
2.2  
2.6  
2.9  
3.3  
4.8  
2.5  
2.9  
3.3  
3.8  
5.5  
2.9  
3.4  
3.9  
4.4  
6.4  
4.1  
4.8  
5.5  
6.2  
9.0  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
1. For dual-module macros, use t  
+ t  
+ t  
, t + t  
+ t  
, or t  
+ t  
+ t  
, whichever is appropriate.  
SUD  
PD1  
RD1  
PDn CO  
RD1  
PDn  
PD1  
RD1  
2. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
3. Data applies to macros based on the S-module. Timing parameters for sequential macros constructed from C-modules  
can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
4. Set-up and hold timing parameters for the Input Buffer Latch are defined with respect to the PAD and the D input.  
External setup/hold timing parameters must account for delay from an external PAD signal to the G inputs. Delay from an  
external PAD signal to the G input subtracts (adds) to the internal setup (hold) time.  
5. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
1-75  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-38 • A42MX36 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 5.0 V Operation)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCCA = 4.75 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed –1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Global Clock Network  
tCKH Input LOW to HIGH  
tCKL  
FO = 32  
FO = 635  
2.7  
3.0  
3.0  
3.3  
3.4  
3.8  
4.0  
4.4  
5.6  
6.2  
ns  
ns  
FO = 32  
FO = 635  
3.8  
4.9  
4.2  
5.4  
4.8  
6.1  
5.6  
7.2  
7.8  
10.1  
ns  
ns  
Input HIGH to LOW  
Minimum Pulse  
Width HIGH  
FO = 32  
FO = 635  
1.8  
2.0  
2.0  
2.2  
2.2  
2.5  
2.6  
2.9  
3.6  
4.1  
ns  
ns  
tPWH  
tPWL  
tCKSW  
tSUEXT  
tHEXT  
tP  
Minimum Pulse  
Width LOW  
FO = 32  
FO = 635  
1.8  
2.0  
2.0  
2.2  
2.2  
2.5  
2.6  
2.9  
3.6  
4.1  
ns  
ns  
FO = 32  
FO = 635  
0.8  
0.8  
0.8  
0.8  
0.9  
0.9  
1.0  
1.0  
1.4  
1.4  
ns  
ns  
Maximum Skew  
Input Latch External FO = 32  
Set-Up FO = 635  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
ns  
ns  
Input Latch External FO = 32  
Hold  
2.8  
3.3  
3.2  
3.7  
3.6  
4.2  
4.2  
4.9  
5.9  
6.9  
ns  
ns  
FO = 635  
Minimum Period  
FO = 32  
FO = 635  
5.5  
6.0  
6.1  
6.6  
6.6  
7.2  
7.6  
8.3  
12.7  
13.8  
ns  
ns  
(1/fMAX  
)
Maximum Datapath FO = 32  
Frequency FO = 635  
180  
166  
164  
151  
151  
139  
131  
121  
79  
73  
MHz  
MHz  
fMAX  
TTL Output Module Timing5  
tDLH  
Data-to-Pad HIGH  
2.6  
3.0  
2.7  
3.0  
5.3  
2.8  
3.3  
3.0  
3.3  
5.8  
3.2  
3.7  
3.3  
3.7  
6.6  
3.8  
4.4  
3.9  
4.3  
7.8  
5.3  
6.2  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tDHL  
Data-to-Pad LOW  
tENZH  
tENZL  
tENHZ  
Notes:  
Enable Pad Z to HIGH  
Enable Pad Z to LOW  
Enable Pad HIGH to Z  
5.5  
6.1  
10.9  
1. For dual-module macros, use t  
+ t  
+ t  
, t + t  
+ t  
, or t  
+ t  
+ t  
, whichever is appropriate.  
SUD  
PD1  
RD1  
PDn CO  
RD1  
PDn  
PD1  
RD1  
2. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
3. Data applies to macros based on the S-module. Timing parameters for sequential macros constructed from C-modules  
can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
4. Set-up and hold timing parameters for the Input Buffer Latch are defined with respect to the PAD and the D input.  
External setup/hold timing parameters must account for delay from an external PAD signal to the G inputs. Delay from an  
external PAD signal to the G input subtracts (adds) to the internal setup (hold) time.  
5. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
Revision 12  
1-76  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-38 • A42MX36 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 5.0 V Operation)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCCA = 4.75 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed –1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
TTL Output Module Timing5 (Continued)  
tENLZ  
tGLH  
tGHL  
tLSU  
tLH  
Enable Pad LOW to Z  
G-to-Pad HIGH  
4.9  
2.9  
2.9  
5.5  
3.3  
3.3  
6.2  
3.7  
3.7  
7.3  
4.4  
4.4  
10.2  
6.1  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
G-to-Pad LOW  
6.1  
I/O Latch Output Set-Up  
I/O Latch Output Hold  
0.5  
0.0  
0.5  
0.0  
0.6  
0.0  
0.7  
0.0  
1.0  
0.0  
tLCO  
I/O Latch Clock-to-Out  
(Pad-to-Pad) 32 I/O  
5.7  
7.8  
6.3  
8.6  
7.1  
9.8  
8.4  
11.8  
16.1  
tACO  
Array Latch Clock-to-Out  
(Pad-to-Pad) 32 I/O  
11.5  
0.10  
0.10  
ns  
dTLH  
dTHL  
Notes:  
Capacitive Loading,  
LOW to HIGH  
0.07  
0.07  
0.08  
0.08  
0.09  
0.09  
0.14 ns/pF  
0.14 ns/pF  
Capacitive Loading,  
HIGH to LOW  
1. For dual-module macros, use t  
+ t  
+ t  
, t + t  
+ t  
, or t  
+ t  
+ t  
, whichever is appropriate.  
SUD  
PD1  
RD1  
PDn CO  
RD1  
PDn  
PD1  
RD1  
2. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
3. Data applies to macros based on the S-module. Timing parameters for sequential macros constructed from C-modules  
can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
4. Set-up and hold timing parameters for the Input Buffer Latch are defined with respect to the PAD and the D input.  
External setup/hold timing parameters must account for delay from an external PAD signal to the G inputs. Delay from an  
external PAD signal to the G input subtracts (adds) to the internal setup (hold) time.  
5. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
1-77  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-38 • A42MX36 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 5.0 V Operation)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCCA = 4.75 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed –1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
CMOS Output Module Timing5  
tDLH  
tDHL  
tENZH  
tENZL  
tENHZ  
tENLZ  
tGLH  
tGHL  
tLSU  
Data-to-Pad HIGH  
Data-to-Pad LOW  
Enable Pad Z to HIGH  
Enable Pad Z to LOW  
Enable Pad HIGH to Z  
Enable Pad LOW to Z  
G-to-Pad HIGH  
3.5  
2.5  
2.7  
2.9  
5.3  
4.9  
5.0  
5.0  
3.9  
2.7  
3.0  
3.3  
5.8  
5.5  
5.6  
5.6  
4.5  
3.1  
3.3  
3.7  
6.6  
6.2  
6.3  
6.3  
5.2  
3.6  
3.9  
4.3  
7.8  
7.3  
7.5  
7.5  
7.3  
5.1  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
5.5  
6.1  
10.9  
10.2  
10.4  
10.4  
G-to-Pad LOW  
I/O Latch Set-Up  
0.5  
0.0  
0.5  
0.0  
0.6  
0.0  
0.7  
0.0  
1.0  
0.0  
tLH  
I/O Latch Hold  
tLCO  
I/O Latch Clock-to-Out  
(Pad-to-Pad) 32 I/O  
5.7  
7.8  
6.3  
8.6  
7.1  
9.8  
8.4  
11.8  
16.1  
tACO  
Array Latch Clock-to-Out  
(Pad-to-Pad) 32 I/O  
11.5  
0.10  
0.10  
ns  
dTLH  
dTHL  
Notes:  
Capacitive Loading,  
LOW to HIGH  
0.07  
0.07  
0.08  
0.08  
0.09  
0.09  
0.14 ns/pF  
0.14 ns/pF  
Capacitive Loading,  
HIGH to LOW  
1. For dual-module macros, use t  
+ t  
+ t  
, t + t  
+ t  
, or t  
+ t  
+ t  
, whichever is appropriate.  
SUD  
PD1  
RD1  
PDn CO  
RD1  
PDn  
PD1  
RD1  
2. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
3. Data applies to macros based on the S-module. Timing parameters for sequential macros constructed from C-modules  
can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
4. Set-up and hold timing parameters for the Input Buffer Latch are defined with respect to the PAD and the D input.  
External setup/hold timing parameters must account for delay from an external PAD signal to the G inputs. Delay from an  
external PAD signal to the G input subtracts (adds) to the internal setup (hold) time.  
5. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
Revision 12  
1-78  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-39 • A42MX36 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 3.3 V Operation)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCCA = 3.0 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed –1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Logic Module Combinatorial Functions1  
tPD  
Internal Array Module Delay  
1.9  
2.2  
2.1  
2.5  
2.3  
2.8  
2.7  
3.3  
3.8  
4.7  
ns  
ns  
tPDD  
Internal Decode Module Delay  
Logic Module Predicted Routing Delays2  
tRD1  
tRD2  
tRD3  
tRD4  
tRD5  
tRDD  
FO = 1 Routing Delay  
FO = 2 Routing Delay  
FO = 3 Routing Delay  
FO = 4 Routing Delay  
FO = 8 Routing Delay  
Decode-to-Output Routing Delay  
1.3  
1.8  
2.3  
2.8  
4.6  
0.5  
1.5  
2.0  
2.5  
3.1  
5.2  
0.5  
1.7  
2.3  
2.8  
3.5  
5.8  
0.6  
2.0  
2.7  
3.4  
4.1  
6.9  
0.7  
2.7  
3.7  
4.7  
5.7  
9.6  
1.0  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Logic Module Sequential Timing3, 4  
tCO  
Flip-Flop Clock-to-Output  
1.8  
1.8  
2.0  
2.0  
2.3  
2.3  
2.7  
2.7  
3.7  
3.7  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tGO  
Latch Gate-to-Output  
tSUD  
tHD  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Set-Up Time  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Hold Time  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Reset-to-Output  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Enable Set-Up  
Flip-Flop (Latch) Enable Hold  
0.4  
0.0  
0.5  
0.0  
0.6  
0.0  
0.7  
0.0  
0.9  
0.0  
tRO  
2.2  
2.4  
2.7  
3.2  
4.5  
tSUENA  
tHENA  
tWCLKA  
1.0  
0.0  
4.6  
1.1  
0.0  
5.2  
1.2  
0.0  
5.8  
1.4  
0.0  
6.9  
2.0  
0.0  
9.6  
Flip-Flop (Latch)  
Clock Active Pulse Width  
tWASYN  
Flip-Flop (Latch)  
6.1  
6.8  
7.7  
9.0  
12.6  
ns  
Asynchronous Pulse Width  
Synchronous SRAM Operations  
tRC  
Read Cycle Time  
9.5  
9.5  
4.8  
10.5  
10.5  
5.3  
11.9  
11.9  
6.0  
14.0  
14.0  
7.0  
19.6  
19.6  
9.8  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tWC  
Write Cycle Time  
tRCKHL  
tRCO  
tADSU  
Notes:  
Clock HIGH/LOW Time  
Data Valid After Clock HIGH/LOW  
Address/Data Set-Up Time  
4.8  
5.3  
6.0  
7.0  
9.8  
2.3  
2.5  
2.8  
3.4  
4.8  
1. For dual-module macros, use t  
+ t  
+ t  
, t + t  
+ t  
, or t  
+ t  
+ t  
, whichever is appropriate.  
SUD  
PD1  
RD1  
PDn CO  
RD1  
PDn  
PD1  
RD1  
2. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
3. Data applies to macros based on the S-module. Timing parameters for sequential macros constructed from C-modules  
can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
4. Set-up and hold timing parameters for the Input Buffer Latch are defined with respect to the PAD and the D input.  
External setup/hold timing parameters must account for delay from an external PAD signal to the G inputs. Delay from an  
external PAD signal to the G input subtracts (adds) to the internal setup (hold) time.  
5. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
1-79  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-39 • A42MX36 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 3.3 V Operation) (continued)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCCA = 3.0 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed –1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Synchronous SRAM Operations (continued)  
tADH  
Address/Data Hold Time  
Read Enable Set-Up  
Read Enable Hold  
0.0  
0.9  
4.8  
3.8  
0.0  
3.9  
0.0  
0.0  
1.0  
5.3  
4.2  
0.0  
4.3  
0.0  
0.0  
1.1  
6.0  
4.8  
0.0  
4.9  
0.0  
0.0  
1.3  
7.0  
5.6  
0.0  
5.7  
0.0  
0.0  
1.8  
9.8  
7.8  
0.0  
8.0  
0.0  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tRENSU  
tRENH  
tWENSU  
tWENH  
tBENS  
tBENH  
Write Enable Set-Up  
Write Enable Hold  
Block Enable Set-Up  
Block Enable Hold  
Asynchronous SRAM Operations  
tRPD  
Asynchronous Access Time  
Read Address Valid  
11.3  
12.6  
14.3  
16.8  
23.5  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tRDADV  
tADSU  
tADH  
12.3  
2.3  
13.7  
2.5  
15.5  
2.8  
18.2  
3.4  
25.5  
4.8  
Address/Data Set-Up Time  
Address/Data Hold Time  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
tRENSUA Read Enable Set-Up to Address 0.9  
Valid  
1.0  
1.1  
1.3  
1.8  
tRENHA  
tWENSU  
tWENH  
tDOH  
Read Enable Hold  
Write Enable Set-Up  
Write Enable Hold  
Data Out Hold Time  
4.8  
3.8  
0.0  
5.3  
4.2  
0.0  
6.0  
4.8  
0.0  
7.0  
5.6  
0.0  
9.8  
7.8  
0.0  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
1.8  
2.0  
2.1  
2.5  
3.5  
Input Module Propagation Delays  
tINPY  
tINGO  
tINH  
Input Data Pad-to-Y  
Input Latch Gate-to-Output  
Input Latch Hold  
1.4  
2.0  
1.6  
2.2  
1.8  
2.5  
2.1  
2.9  
3.0  
4.1  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
0.0  
0.7  
6.5  
0.0  
0.7  
7.3  
0.0  
0.8  
8.2  
0.0  
1.0  
9.7  
0.0  
1.4  
tINSU  
tILA  
Input Latch Set-Up  
Latch Active Pulse Width  
13.5  
Notes:  
1. For dual-module macros, use t  
+ t  
+ t  
, t + t  
+ t  
, or t  
+ t  
+ t  
, whichever is appropriate.  
SUD  
PD1  
RD1  
PDn CO  
RD1  
PDn  
PD1  
RD1  
2. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
3. Data applies to macros based on the S-module. Timing parameters for sequential macros constructed from C-modules  
can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
4. Set-up and hold timing parameters for the Input Buffer Latch are defined with respect to the PAD and the D input.  
External setup/hold timing parameters must account for delay from an external PAD signal to the G inputs. Delay from an  
external PAD signal to the G input subtracts (adds) to the internal setup (hold) time.  
5. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
Revision 12  
1-80  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-39 • A42MX36 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 3.3 V Operation) (continued)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCCA = 3.0 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed –1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
Input Module Predicted Routing Delays2  
tIRD1  
tIRD2  
tIRD3  
tIRD4  
tIRD8  
FO = 1 Routing Delay  
FO = 2 Routing Delay  
FO = 3 Routing Delay  
FO = 4 Routing Delay  
FO = 8 Routing Delay  
2.8  
3.2  
3.7  
4.2  
6.1  
3.1  
3.5  
4.1  
4.6  
6.8  
3.5  
4.1  
4.7  
5.3  
7.7  
4.1  
4.8  
5.5  
6.2  
9.0  
5.7  
6.7  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
7.7  
8.7  
12.6  
Global Clock Network  
tCKH Input LOW to HIGH  
tCKL  
FO = 32  
FO = 635  
4.6  
5.0  
5.1  
5.6  
5.7  
6.3  
6.7  
7.4  
9.3  
10.3  
ns  
ns  
FO = 32  
FO = 635  
5.3  
6.8  
5.9  
7.6  
6.7  
8.6  
7.8  
10.1  
11.0  
14.1  
ns  
ns  
Input HIGH to LOW  
Minimum Pulse  
Width HIGH  
FO = 32  
FO = 635  
2.5  
2.8  
2.7  
3.1  
3.1  
3.5  
3.6  
4.1  
5.1  
5.7  
ns  
ns  
tPWH  
tPWL  
tCKSW  
tSUEXT  
tHEXT  
tP  
Minimum Pulse  
Width LOW  
FO = 32  
FO = 635  
2.5  
2.8  
2.7  
3.1  
3.1  
3.5  
3.6  
4.1  
5.1  
5.7  
ns  
ns  
FO = 32  
FO = 635  
1.0  
1.0  
1.2  
1.2  
1.3  
1.3  
1.5  
1.5  
2.2  
2.2  
ns  
ns  
Maximum Skew  
Input Latch  
External Set-Up  
FO = 32  
FO = 635  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
ns  
ns  
Input Latch  
External Hold  
FO = 32  
FO = 635  
4.0  
4.6  
4.4  
5.2  
5.0  
5.9  
5.9  
6.9  
8.2  
9.6  
ns  
ns  
Minimum Period  
FO = 32  
FO = 635  
9.2  
9.9  
10.2  
11.0  
11.1  
12.0  
12.7  
13.8  
21.2  
23.0  
ns  
ns  
(1/fMAX  
)
Maximum  
Frequency  
Datapath FO = 32  
FO = 635  
108  
100  
98  
91  
90  
83  
79  
73  
47  
44  
MHz  
MHz  
fMAX  
TTL Output Module Timing5  
tDLH  
Data-to-Pad HIGH  
3.6  
4.2  
4.0  
4.6  
4.2  
4.6  
8.2  
4.5  
5.2  
4.7  
5.2  
9.3  
5.3  
6.2  
7.4  
8.6  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tDHL  
Data-to-Pad LOW  
tENZH  
tENZL  
tENHZ  
Notes:  
Enable Pad Z to HIGH  
Enable Pad Z to LOW  
Enable Pad HIGH to Z  
3.7  
5.5  
7.7  
4.1  
6.1  
8.5  
7.34  
10.9  
15.3  
1. For dual-module macros, use t  
+ t  
+ t  
, t + t  
+ t  
, or t  
+ t  
+ t  
, whichever is appropriate.  
SUD  
PD1  
RD1  
PDn CO  
RD1  
PDn  
PD1  
RD1  
2. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
3. Data applies to macros based on the S-module. Timing parameters for sequential macros constructed from C-modules  
can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
4. Set-up and hold timing parameters for the Input Buffer Latch are defined with respect to the PAD and the D input.  
External setup/hold timing parameters must account for delay from an external PAD signal to the G inputs. Delay from an  
external PAD signal to the G input subtracts (adds) to the internal setup (hold) time.  
5. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
1-81  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Table 1-39 • A42MX36 Timing Characteristics (Nominal 3.3 V Operation) (continued)  
(Worst-Case Commercial Conditions, VCCA = 3.0 V, TJ = 70°C)  
–3 Speed –2 Speed –1 Speed Std Speed –F Speed  
Parameter / Description  
Units  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
TTL Output Module Timing5  
tENLZ  
tGLH  
tGHL  
tLSU  
tLH  
Enable Pad LOW to Z  
G-to-Pad HIGH  
6.9  
4.9  
4.9  
7.6  
5.5  
5.5  
8.7  
6.2  
6.2  
10.2  
7.3  
14.3  
10.2  
10.2  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
G-to-Pad LOW  
7.3  
I/O Latch Output Set-Up  
I/O Latch Output Hold  
0.7  
0.0  
0.7  
0.0  
0.8  
0.0  
1.0  
0.0  
1.4  
0.0  
tLCO  
I/O Latch Clock-to-Out  
(Pad-to-Pad) 32 I/O  
7.9  
8.8  
10.0  
13.7  
11.8  
16.1  
16.5  
22.5  
tACO  
Array Latch Clock-to-Out  
(Pad-to-Pad) 32 I/O  
10.9  
12.1  
ns  
dTLH  
dTHL  
Capacitive Loading, LOW to HIGH  
0.10  
0.10  
0.11  
0.11  
0.12  
0.12  
0.14  
0.14  
0.20 ns/pF  
0.20 ns/pF  
Capacitive Loading, HIGH to LOW  
CMOS Output Module Timing5  
tDLH  
tDHL  
tENZH  
tENZL  
tENHZ  
tENLZ  
tGLH  
tGHL  
tLSU  
Data-to-Pad HIGH  
Data-to-Pad LOW  
Enable Pad Z to HIGH  
Enable Pad Z to LOW  
Enable Pad HIGH to Z  
Enable Pad LOW to Z  
G-to-Pad HIGH  
4.9  
3.4  
3.7  
4.1  
7.4  
6.9  
7.0  
7.0  
5.5  
3.8  
4.1  
4.6  
8.2  
7.6  
7.8  
7.8  
6.2  
4.3  
4.7  
5.2  
9.3  
8.7  
8.9  
8.9  
7.3  
5.1  
10.3  
7.1  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
5.5  
7.7  
6.1  
8.5  
10.9  
10.2  
10.4  
10.4  
15.3  
14.3  
14.6  
14.6  
G-to-Pad LOW  
I/O Latch Set-Up  
0.7  
0.0  
0.7  
0.0  
0.8  
0.0  
1.0  
0.0  
1.4  
0.0  
tLH  
I/O Latch Hold  
tLCO  
I/O Latch Clock-to-Out  
(Pad-to-Pad) 32 I/O  
7.9  
8.8  
10.0  
11.8  
16.5  
Notes:  
1. For dual-module macros, use t  
+ t  
+ t  
, t + t  
+ t  
, or t  
+ t  
+ t  
, whichever is appropriate.  
SUD  
PD1  
RD1  
PDn CO  
RD1  
PDn  
PD1  
RD1  
2. Routing delays are for typical designs across worst-case operating conditions. These parameters should be used for  
estimating device performance. Post-route timing analysis or simulation is required to determine actual performance.  
3. Data applies to macros based on the S-module. Timing parameters for sequential macros constructed from C-modules  
can be obtained from the Timer utility.  
4. Set-up and hold timing parameters for the Input Buffer Latch are defined with respect to the PAD and the D input.  
External setup/hold timing parameters must account for delay from an external PAD signal to the G inputs. Delay from an  
external PAD signal to the G input subtracts (adds) to the internal setup (hold) time.  
5. Delays based on 35 pF loading.  
Revision 12  
1-82  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Pin Descriptions  
CLK/A/B, I/O  
Global Clock  
Clock inputs for clock distribution networks. CLK is for 40MX while CLKA and CLKB are for 42MX devices. The clock  
input is buffered prior to clocking the logic modules. This pin can also be used as an I/O.  
DCLK, I/O  
Diagnostic Clock  
Clock input for diagnostic probe and device programming. DCLK is active when the MODE pin is HIGH. This pin  
functions as an I/O when the MODE pin is LOW.  
GND  
Ground  
Input LOW supply voltage.  
I/O  
Input/Output  
Input, output, tristate or bidirectional buffer. Input and output levels are compatible with standard TTL and CMOS  
specifications. Unused I/Os pins are configured by the Designer software as shown in Table 1-40.  
Table 1-40 • Configuration of Unused I/Os  
Device  
Configuration  
Pulled LOW  
Pulled LOW  
Tristated  
A40MX02, A40MX04  
A42MX09, A42MX16  
A42MX24, A42MX36  
In all cases, it is recommended to tie all unused MX I/O pins to LOW on the board. This applies to all dual-purpose pins  
when configured as I/Os as well.  
LP  
Low Power Mode  
Controls the low power mode of all 42MX devices. The device is placed in the low power mode by connecting the LP  
pin to logic HIGH. In low power mode, all I/Os are tristated, all input buffers are turned OFF, and the core of the device  
is turned OFF. To exit the low power mode, the LP pin must be set LOW. The device enters the low power mode 800 ns  
after the LP pin is driven to a logic HIGH. It will resume normal operation in 200 µs after the LP pin is driven to a logic  
LOW.  
MODE  
Mode  
Controls the use of multifunction pins (DCLK, PRA, PRB, SDI, TDO). The MODE pin is held HIGH to provide  
verification capability. The MODE pin should be terminated to GND through a 10kresistor so that the MODE pin can  
be pulled HIGH when required.  
NC  
No Connection  
This pin is not connected to circuitry within the device. These pins can be driven to any voltage or can be left floating  
with no effect on the operation of the device.  
PRA, I/O  
PRB, I/O  
Probe A/B  
The Probe pin is used to output data from any user-defined design node within the device. Each diagnostic pin can be  
used in conjunction with the other probe pin to allow real-time diagnostic output of any signal path within the device.  
The Probe pin can be used as a user-defined I/O when verification has been completed. The pin's probe capabilities  
can be permanently disabled to protect programmed design confidentiality. The Probe pin is accessible when the  
MODE pin is HIGH. This pin functions as an I/O when the MODE pin is LOW.  
QCLKA/B/C/D, I/O Quadrant Clock  
Quadrant clock inputs for A42MX36 devices. When not used as a register control signal, these pins can function as  
user I/Os.  
1-83  
Revision 12  
 
 
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
SDI, I/O  
Serial Data Input  
Serial data input for diagnostic probe and device programming. SDI is active when the MODE pin is HIGH. This pin  
functions as an I/O when the MODE pin is LOW.  
SDO, I/O  
Serial Data Output  
Serial data output for diagnostic probe and device programming. SDO is active when the MODE pin is HIGH. This pin  
functions as an I/O when the MODE pin is LOW. SDO is available for 42MX devices only.  
When Silicon Explorer II is being used, SDO will act as an output while the "checksum" command is run. It will return to  
user I/O when "checksum" is complete.  
TCK, I/O  
Test Clock  
Clock signal to shift the Boundary Scan Test (BST) data into the device. This pin functions as an I/O when "Reserve  
JTAG" is not checked in the Designer Software. BST pins are only available in A42MX24 and A42MX36 devices.  
TDI, I/O  
Test Data In  
Serial data input for BST instructions and data. Data is shifted in on the rising edge of TCK. This pin functions as an I/O  
when "Reserve JTAG" is not checked in the Designer Software. BST pins are only available in A42MX24 and  
A42MX36 devices.  
TDO, I/O  
Test Data Out  
Serial data output for BST instructions and test data. This pin functions as an I/O when "Reserve JTAG" is not checked  
in the Designer Software. BST pins are only available in A42MX24 and A42MX36 devices.  
TMS, I/O  
Test Mode Select  
The TMS pin controls the use of the IEEE 1149.1 Boundary Scan pins (TCK, TDI, TDO). In flexible mode when the  
TMS pin is set LOW, the TCK, TDI and TDO pins are boundary scan pins. Once the boundary scan pins are in test  
mode, they will remain in that mode until the internal boundary scan state machine reaches the "logic reset" state. At  
this point, the boundary scan pins will be released and will function as regular I/O pins. The "logic reset" state is  
reached 5 TCK cycles after the TMS pin is set HIGH. In dedicated test mode, TMS functions as specified in the IEEE  
1149.1 specifications. IEEE JTAG specification recommends a 10kpull-up resistor on the pin. BST pins are only  
available in A42MX24 and A42MX36 devices.  
VCC  
Input supply voltage for 40MX devices  
VCCA Supply Voltage  
Supply voltage for array in 42MX devices  
VCCI Supply Voltage  
Supply voltage for I/Os in 42MX devices  
WD, I/O Wide Decode Output  
Supply Voltage  
When a wide decode module is used in a 42MX device this pin can be used as a dedicated output from the wide  
decode module. This direct connection eliminates additional interconnect delays associated with regular logic  
modules. To implement the direct I/O connection, connect an output buffer of any type to the output of the wide decode  
macro and place this output on one of the reserved WD pins.  
Revision 12  
1-84  
2 – Package Pin Assignments  
PL44  
1
44  
44-Pin  
PLCC  
Revision 12  
2-1  
 
Package Pin Assignments  
PL44  
Pin Number A40MX02 Function A40MX04 Function  
PL44  
Pin Number A40MX02 Function A40MX04 Function  
1
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
DCLK, I/O  
PRA, I/O  
PRB, I/O  
I/O  
DCLK, I/O  
PRA, I/O  
PRB, I/O  
I/O  
2
3
VCC  
I/O  
VCC  
I/O  
4
5
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
6
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
7
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
GND  
8
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
9
I/O  
I/O  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCC  
I/O  
VCC  
I/O  
VCC  
I/O  
VCC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCC  
I/O  
VCC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
CLK, I/O  
MODE  
VCC  
SDI, I/O  
GND  
CLK, I/O  
MODE  
VCC  
SDI, I/O  
2-2  
Revision 12  
Package Pin Assignments  
PL68  
1 68  
68-Pin  
PLCC  
2-3  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
PL68  
PL68  
Pin  
Number  
A40MX02 A40MX04  
Function Function  
Pin  
Number  
A40MX02 A40MX04  
Function Function  
1
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
2
3
I/O  
I/O  
VCC  
I/O  
VCC  
I/O  
4
VCC  
I/O  
VCC  
I/O  
5
I/O  
I/O  
6
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
7
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
8
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
9
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
CLK, I/O  
I/O  
CLK, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
MODE  
VCC  
SDI, I/O  
MODE  
VCC  
SDI, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCC  
I/O  
VCC  
I/O  
DCLK, I/O DCLK, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
PRA, I/O  
PRB, I/O  
I/O  
PRA, I/O  
PRB, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCC  
I/O  
VCC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
Revision 12  
2-4  
 
Package Pin Assignments  
PL84  
1 84  
84-Pin  
PLCC  
2-5  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
PL84  
Pin Number  
A40MX04 Function A42MX09 Function  
A42MX16 Function  
A42MX24 Function  
1
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
CLKB, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
CLKB, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
CLKB, I/O  
I/O  
2
3
I/O  
4
VCC  
I/O  
PRB, I/O  
I/O  
PRB, I/O  
I/O  
PRB, I/O  
WD, I/O  
GND  
I/O  
5
6
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
7
I/O  
8
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
DCLK, I/O  
I/O  
9
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
I/O  
DCLK, I/O  
I/O  
DCLK, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
MODE  
I/O  
MODE  
I/O  
MODE  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCCA  
VCCI  
I/O  
VCCI  
VCCA  
I/O  
VCCI  
VCCA  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCC  
VCC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
TMS, I/O  
TDI, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
Revision 12  
2-6  
Package Pin Assignments  
PL84  
A40MX04 Function A42MX09 Function  
Pin Number  
37  
A42MX16 Function  
A42MX24 Function  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
38  
39  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
40  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
41  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
42  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
43  
I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
VCCA  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
44  
I/O  
45  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
46  
VCC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
47  
I/O  
I/O  
48  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
49  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
SDO, TDO, I/O  
I/O  
50  
I/O  
51  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
52  
I/O  
SDO, I/O  
I/O  
SDO, I/O  
I/O  
53  
I/O  
54  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
55  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
56  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
57  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
58  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
59  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
60  
GND  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
61  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
62  
I/O  
I/O  
TCK, I/O  
LP  
63  
I/O  
LP  
LP  
64  
CLK, I/O  
I/O  
VCCA  
VCCI  
I/O  
VCCA  
VCCI  
I/O  
VCCA  
VCCI  
I/O  
65  
66  
MODE  
VCC  
VCC  
I/O  
67  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
68  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
69  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
70  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
71  
I/O  
72  
SDI, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
2-7  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
PL84  
Pin Number  
A40MX04 Function A42MX09 Function  
A42MX16 Function  
A42MX24 Function  
I/O  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
DCLK, I/O  
PRA, I/O  
PRB, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
SDI, I/O  
I/O  
SDI, I/O  
I/O  
SDI, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
PRA, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
PRA, I/O  
I/O  
PRA, I/O  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
CLKA, I/O  
VCCA  
CLKA, I/O  
VCCA  
CLKA, I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
Revision 12  
2-8  
Package Pin Assignments  
PQ100  
100-Pin  
PQFP  
100  
1
2-9  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
PQ100  
A40MX02 Function A40MX04 Function A42MX09 Function A42MX16 Function  
Pin Number  
1
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
PRB, I/O  
I/O  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
PRB, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
DCLK, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
DCLK, I/O  
I/O  
2
3
4
MODE  
I/O  
MODE  
I/O  
5
6
I/O  
I/O  
7
I/O  
I/O  
8
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
9
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCCA  
VCCI  
I/O  
VCCA  
VCCA  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCC  
I/O  
VCC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
I/O  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
Revision 12  
2-10  
 
Package Pin Assignments  
PQ100  
Pin Number  
37  
A40MX02 Function A40MX04 Function A42MX09 Function A42MX16 Function  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
38  
39  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
40  
I/O  
I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
41  
I/O  
I/O  
42  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
43  
VCC  
VCC  
I/O  
VCC  
VCC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
44  
I/O  
I/O  
45  
I/O  
I/O  
46  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
47  
I/O  
I/O  
48  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
VCC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
49  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
50  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
51  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
VCC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
52  
SDO, I/O  
I/O  
SDO, I/O  
I/O  
53  
54  
I/O  
I/O  
55  
I/O  
I/O  
56  
I/O  
I/O  
57  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
58  
I/O  
I/O  
59  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
60  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
61  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
62  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
63  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
64  
LP  
LP  
65  
I/O  
I/O  
VCCA  
VCCI  
VCCA  
I/O  
VCCA  
VCCI  
VCCA  
I/O  
66  
I/O  
I/O  
67  
I/O  
I/O  
68  
I/O  
I/O  
69  
VCC  
I/O  
VCC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
70  
I/O  
I/O  
71  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
72  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
GND  
2-11  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
PQ100  
A40MX02 Function A40MX04 Function A42MX09 Function A42MX16 Function  
Pin Number  
73  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
74  
75  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
76  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
77  
NC  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
78  
NC  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
79  
NC  
NC  
SDI, I/O  
I/O  
SDI, I/O  
I/O  
80  
NC  
I/O  
81  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
82  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
83  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
84  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
85  
I/O  
I/O  
86  
GND  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
87  
PRA, I/O  
I/O  
PRA, I/O  
I/O  
88  
89  
I/O  
I/O  
CLKA, I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
CLKA, I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
90  
CLK, I/O  
I/O  
CLK, I/O  
I/O  
91  
92  
MODE  
VCC  
VCC  
NC  
MODE  
VCC  
VCC  
I/O  
CLKB, I/O  
I/O  
CLKB, I/O  
I/O  
93  
94  
PRB, I/O  
I/O  
PRB, I/O  
I/O  
95  
96  
NC  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
97  
NC  
I/O  
98  
SDI, I/O  
DCLK, I/O  
PRA, I/O  
SDI, I/O  
DCLK, I/O  
PRA, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
99  
I/O  
I/O  
100  
I/O  
I/O  
Revision 12  
2-12  
Package Pin Assignments  
PQ160  
160  
1
160-Pin  
PQFP  
2-13  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
PQ160  
Pin Number  
A42MX09 Function  
A42MX16 Function  
A42MX24 Function  
I/O  
1
I/O  
DCLK, I/O  
NC  
I/O  
DCLK, I/O  
I/O  
2
DCLK, I/O  
I/O  
3
4
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
VCCI  
I/O  
5
I/O  
I/O  
6
NC  
VCCI  
I/O  
7
I/O  
8
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
9
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
NC  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
PRB, I/O  
I/O  
PRB, I/O  
I/O  
PRB, I/O  
I/O  
CLKB, I/O  
I/O  
CLKB, I/O  
I/O  
CLKB, I/O  
I/O  
VCCA  
CLKA, I/O  
I/O  
VCCA  
CLKA, I/O  
I/O  
VCCA  
CLKA, I/O  
I/O  
PRA, I/O  
NC  
PRA, I/O  
I/O  
PRA, I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
GND  
GND  
NC  
GND  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
VCCI  
I/O  
VCCI  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
Revision 12  
2-14  
 
Package Pin Assignments  
PQ160  
Pin Number  
37  
A42MX09 Function  
A42MX16 Function  
A42MX24 Function  
I/O  
SDI, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
SDI, I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
SDI, I/O  
I/O  
38  
39  
40  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
41  
42  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
43  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
44  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
45  
46  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
47  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
48  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
49  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
50  
51  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
52  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
53  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
54  
NC  
VCCA  
I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
55  
I/O  
56  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
57  
VCCA  
VCCI  
GND  
VCCA  
LP  
VCCA  
VCCI  
GND  
VCCA  
LP  
VCCA  
VCCI  
GND  
VCCA  
LP  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
I/O  
I/O  
TCK, I/O  
I/O  
63  
I/O  
I/O  
64  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
65  
66  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
67  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
68  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
69  
GND  
NC  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
70  
71  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
72  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
2-15  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
PQ160  
Pin Number  
73  
A42MX09 Function  
A42MX16 Function  
A42MX24 Function  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
74  
75  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
76  
I/O  
I/O  
77  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
78  
I/O  
I/O  
79  
NC  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
80  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
81  
82  
SDO, I/O  
I/O  
SDO, I/O  
I/O  
SDO, TDO, I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
83  
84  
I/O  
I/O  
85  
I/O  
I/O  
86  
NC  
I/O  
VCCI  
I/O  
VCCI  
I/O  
87  
88  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
GND  
I/O  
89  
GND  
NC  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
90  
91  
I/O  
I/O  
92  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
93  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
94  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
95  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
96  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
97  
I/O  
I/O  
98  
VCCA  
GND  
NC  
I/O  
VCCA  
GND  
I/O  
VCCA  
GND  
I/O  
99  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
Revision 12  
2-16  
Package Pin Assignments  
PQ160  
Pin Number  
109  
110  
111  
A42MX09 Function  
A42MX16 Function  
A42MX24 Function  
GND  
NC  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
117  
118  
119  
120  
121  
122  
123  
124  
125  
126  
127  
128  
129  
130  
131  
132  
133  
134  
135  
136  
137  
138  
139  
140  
141  
142  
143  
144  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
VCCI  
I/O  
VCCI  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
TDI, I/O  
TMS, I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
VCCI  
GND  
NC  
I/O  
VCCA  
VCCI  
GND  
I/O  
VCCA  
VCCI  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
2-17  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
PQ160  
Pin Number  
145  
A42MX09 Function  
A42MX16 Function  
A42MX24 Function  
GND  
NC  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
146  
147  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
148  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
149  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
150  
NC  
VCCA  
I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
151  
NC  
152  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
153  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
154  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
155  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
156  
157  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
158  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
159  
MODE  
GND  
MODE  
GND  
MODE  
GND  
160  
Revision 12  
2-18  
Package Pin Assignments  
PQ208  
208  
1
208-Pin PQFP  
2-19  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
PQ208  
Pin Number  
A42MX16 Function  
A42MX24 Function  
A42MX36 Function  
1
GND  
NC  
GND  
VCCA  
MODE  
I/O  
GND  
VCCA  
MODE  
I/O  
2
3
MODE  
I/O  
4
5
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
6
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
7
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
8
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
9
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
VCCI  
VCCA  
I/O  
GND  
VCCI  
VCCA  
I/O  
GND  
VCCI  
VCCA  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
Revision 12  
2-20  
 
Package Pin Assignments  
PQ208  
Pin Number  
37  
A42MX16 Function  
A42MX24 Function  
A42MX36 Function  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
NC  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
NC  
GND  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCCI  
NC  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
38  
39  
I/O  
I/O  
40  
I/O  
I/O  
41  
I/O  
I/O  
42  
I/O  
I/O  
43  
I/O  
I/O  
44  
I/O  
I/O  
45  
I/O  
I/O  
46  
I/O  
I/O  
47  
I/O  
I/O  
48  
I/O  
I/O  
49  
I/O  
I/O  
50  
I/O  
I/O  
51  
I/O  
I/O  
52  
GND  
GND  
TMS, I/O  
TDI, I/O  
I/O  
GND  
GND  
TMS, I/O  
TDI, I/O  
I/O  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
58  
59  
60  
VCCI  
I/O  
VCCI  
I/O  
61  
62  
I/O  
I/O  
63  
I/O  
I/O  
64  
I/O  
I/O  
65  
I/O  
QCLKA, I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
66  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
67  
68  
69  
I/O  
I/O  
70  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
71  
72  
2-21  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
PQ208  
Pin Number  
73  
A42MX16 Function  
A42MX24 Function  
A42MX36 Function  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
74  
75  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
76  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
77  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
78  
GND  
VCCA  
NC  
I/O  
GND  
VCCA  
VCCI  
I/O  
GND  
VCCA  
VCCI  
I/O  
79  
80  
81  
82  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
83  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
84  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
85  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
86  
I/O  
87  
I/O  
88  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
89  
NC  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
90  
I/O  
I/O  
91  
I/O  
QCLKB, I/O  
I/O  
92  
I/O  
I/O  
93  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
94  
I/O  
95  
NC  
NC  
NC  
VCCI  
I/O  
96  
I/O  
I/O  
97  
I/O  
I/O  
98  
VCCI  
I/O  
VCCI  
I/O  
99  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
SDO, I/O  
I/O  
SDO, TDO, I/O  
I/O  
SDO, TDO, I/O  
I/O  
GND  
NC  
I/O  
GND  
VCCA  
I/O  
GND  
VCCA  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
Revision 12  
2-22  
Package Pin Assignments  
PQ208  
Pin Number  
109  
110  
111  
A42MX16 Function  
A42MX24 Function  
A42MX36 Function  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
117  
118  
119  
120  
121  
122  
123  
124  
125  
126  
127  
128  
129  
130  
131  
132  
133  
134  
135  
136  
137  
138  
139  
140  
141  
142  
143  
144  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
TCK, I/O  
LP  
TCK, I/O  
LP  
LP  
VCCA  
GND  
VCCI  
VCCA  
I/O  
VCCA  
GND  
VCCI  
VCCA  
I/O  
VCCA  
GND  
VCCI  
VCCA  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
2-23  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
PQ208  
Pin Number  
145  
146  
147  
148  
149  
150  
151  
152  
153  
154  
155  
156  
157  
158  
159  
160  
161  
162  
163  
164  
165  
166  
167  
168  
169  
170  
171  
172  
173  
174  
175  
176  
177  
178  
179  
180  
A42MX16 Function  
A42MX24 Function  
A42MX36 Function  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
SDI, I/O  
I/O  
SDI, I/O  
I/O  
SDI, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCCI  
NC  
VCCI  
I/O  
VCCI  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
QCLKD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
PRA, I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
PRA, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
PRA, I/O  
I/O  
CLKA, I/O  
CLKA, I/O  
CLKA, I/O  
Revision 12  
2-24  
Package Pin Assignments  
PQ208  
Pin Number  
181  
182  
183  
184  
185  
186  
187  
188  
189  
190  
191  
192  
193  
194  
195  
196  
197  
198  
199  
200  
201  
202  
203  
204  
205  
206  
207  
208  
A42MX16 Function  
A42MX24 Function  
A42MX36 Function  
I/O  
NC  
NC  
I/O  
VCCI  
VCCA  
GND  
I/O  
VCCI  
VCCA  
GND  
I/O  
VCCA  
GND  
I/O  
CLKB, I/O  
I/O  
CLKB, I/O  
I/O  
CLKB, I/O  
I/O  
PRB, I/O  
I/O  
PRB, I/O  
I/O  
PRB, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
QCLKC, I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
VCCI  
I/O  
VCCI  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
VCCI  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
DCLK, I/O  
I/O  
DCLK, I/O  
I/O  
DCLK, I/O  
I/O  
2-25  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
PQ240  
240  
1
240-Pin  
PQFP  
Note: 240-Pin PQFP Package (Top View)  
Revision 12  
2-26  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
PQ240  
PQ240  
PQ240  
Pin Number A42MX36 Function  
Pin Number A42MX36 Function  
Pin Number A42MX36 Function  
1
I/O  
DCLK, I/O  
I/O  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
73  
74  
I/O  
I/O  
2
3
75  
I/O  
4
I/O  
I/O  
76  
I/O  
5
I/O  
I/O  
77  
I/O  
6
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
VCCI  
I/O  
I/O  
78  
I/O  
7
I/O  
79  
I/O  
8
I/O  
80  
I/O  
9
QCLKD, I/O  
I/O  
81  
I/O  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
I/O  
82  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
83  
I/O  
I/O  
84  
I/O  
I/O  
85  
VCCA  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
86  
QCLKC, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
87  
I/O  
VCCI  
I/O  
88  
VCCA  
VCCI  
VCCA  
LP  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
89  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
90  
91  
I/O  
92  
TCK, I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
SDI, I/O  
I/O  
93  
94  
GND  
I/O  
VCCA  
GND  
GND  
I/O  
95  
PRB, I/O  
I/O  
96  
I/O  
97  
I/O  
CLKB, I/O  
I/O  
98  
I/O  
I/O  
99  
I/O  
GND  
VCCA  
VCCI  
I/O  
I/O  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
CLKA, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
PRA, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCCI  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCCI  
Revision 12  
2-27  
 
Package Pin Assignments  
PQ240  
PQ240  
PQ240  
Pin Number A42MX36 Function  
Pin Number A42MX36 Function  
Pin Number A42MX36 Function  
109  
110  
111  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
117  
118  
119  
120  
121  
122  
123  
124  
125  
126  
127  
128  
129  
130  
131  
132  
133  
134  
135  
136  
137  
138  
139  
140  
141  
142  
143  
144  
I/O  
I/O  
145  
146  
147  
148  
149  
150  
151  
152  
153  
154  
155  
156  
157  
158  
159  
160  
161  
162  
163  
164  
165  
166  
167  
168  
169  
170  
171  
172  
173  
174  
175  
176  
177  
178  
179  
180  
I/O  
I/O  
181  
182  
183  
184  
185  
186  
187  
188  
189  
190  
191  
192  
193  
194  
195  
196  
197  
198  
199  
200  
201  
202  
203  
204  
205  
206  
207  
208  
209  
210  
211  
212  
213  
214  
215  
216  
VCCA  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCCI  
VCCA  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCCA  
GND  
GND  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCCI  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
SDO, TDO, I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCCI  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
QCLKA, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
QCLKB, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCCI  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCCA  
VCCI  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
TDI, I/O  
TMS, I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
2-28  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
PQ240  
Pin Number A42MX36 Function  
217  
218  
219  
220  
221  
222  
223  
224  
225  
226  
227  
228  
229  
230  
231  
232  
233  
234  
235  
236  
237  
238  
239  
240  
I/O  
I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCCI  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
MODE  
VCCA  
GND  
Revision 12  
2-29  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
VQ80  
80  
1
80-Pin  
VQFP  
Revision 12  
2-30  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
VQ80  
VQ80  
VQ80  
Pin  
A40MX02 A40MX04  
Pin  
A40MX02 A40MX04  
Pin  
A40MX02 A40MX04  
Number  
Function  
Function  
Number  
Function  
Function  
Number  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
Function  
Function  
1
I/O  
I/O  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
2
NC  
NC  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
3
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
SDI, I/O  
SDI, I/O  
4
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
DCLK, I/O DCLK, I/O  
5
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
PRA, I/O  
NC  
PRA, I/O  
NC  
6
I/O  
I/O  
VCC  
I/O  
VCC  
I/O  
7
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
PRB, I/O  
I/O  
PRB, I/O  
I/O  
8
I/O  
I/O  
9
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCC  
I/O  
VCC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
NC  
NC  
VCC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCC  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
VCC  
I/O  
VCC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
CLK, I/O  
I/O  
CLK, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
MODE  
VCC  
NC  
MODE  
VCC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
GND  
Revision 12  
2-31  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
VQ100  
100  
1
100-Pin  
VQFP  
Revision 12  
2-32  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
VQ100  
VQ100  
VQ100  
Pin  
A42MX09 A42MX16  
Pin  
A42MX09 A42MX16  
Pin  
A42MX09 A42MX16  
Number Function  
Function  
Number Function  
Function  
Number Function  
Function  
1
I/O  
MODE  
I/O  
I/O  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
100  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
2
MODE  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
3
VCCA  
I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
4
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
5
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
6
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
7
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
SDI, I/O  
I/O  
SDI, I/O  
I/O  
8
I/O  
I/O  
9
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCCA  
VCCI  
I/O  
NC  
VCCI  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
SDO, I/O  
I/O  
SDO, I/O  
I/O  
PRA, I/O  
I/O  
PRA, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
CLKA, I/O CLKA, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
CLKB, I/O CLKB, I/O  
I/O  
PRB, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
PRB, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
LP  
LP  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCCA  
VCCI  
VCCA  
I/O  
VCCA  
VCCI  
VCCA  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
DCLK, I/O DCLK, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
GND  
Revision 12  
2-33  
 
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
TQ176  
176  
1
176-Pin  
TQFP  
Revision 12  
2-34  
Package Pin Assignments  
TQ176  
Pin Number  
A42MX09 Function  
A42MX16 Function  
A42MX24 Function  
1
GND  
MODE  
I/O  
GND  
MODE  
I/O  
GND  
MODE  
I/O  
2
3
4
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
5
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
6
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
7
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
8
NC  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
9
I/O  
I/O  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
NC  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
NC  
NC  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
GND  
NC  
VCCA  
NC  
NC  
VCCI  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
VCCI  
VCCA  
I/O  
GND  
VCCI  
VCCA  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
2-35  
Revision 12  
 
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
TQ176  
Pin Number  
37  
A42MX09 Function  
A42MX16 Function  
A42MX24 Function  
NC  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
38  
39  
I/O  
40  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
41  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
42  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
43  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
44  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
45  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
TMS, I/O  
TDI, I/O  
I/O  
46  
47  
I/O  
I/O  
48  
I/O  
I/O  
49  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
50  
I/O  
I/O  
51  
I/O  
I/O  
52  
NC  
I/O  
VCCI  
I/O  
VCCI  
I/O  
53  
54  
NC  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
55  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
56  
I/O  
57  
NC  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
58  
I/O  
59  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
60  
I/O  
I/O  
61  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
62  
I/O  
I/O  
63  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
64  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
65  
I/O  
I/O  
66  
NC  
GND  
VCCA  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
67  
GND  
VCCA  
I/O  
GND  
VCCA  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
68  
69  
70  
I/O  
I/O  
71  
I/O  
I/O  
72  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
Revision 12  
2-36  
Package Pin Assignments  
TQ176  
Pin Number  
73  
A42MX09 Function  
A42MX16 Function  
A42MX24 Function  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
74  
75  
I/O  
I/O  
76  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
77  
NC  
NC  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
78  
79  
I/O  
80  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
81  
I/O  
I/O  
82  
NC  
I/O  
VCCI  
I/O  
VCCI  
I/O  
83  
84  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
85  
I/O  
I/O  
86  
NC  
SDO, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
87  
SDO, I/O  
I/O  
SDO, TDO, I/O  
I/O  
88  
89  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
90  
91  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
92  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
93  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
94  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
95  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
96  
NC  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
97  
I/O  
I/O  
98  
I/O  
I/O  
99  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
NC  
NC  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
TCK, I/O  
2-37  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
TQ176  
Pin Number  
109  
110  
111  
A42MX09 Function  
A42MX16 Function  
A42MX24 Function  
LP  
VCCA  
GND  
VCCI  
VCCA  
NC  
LP  
VCCA  
GND  
VCCI  
VCCA  
I/O  
LP  
VCCA  
GND  
VCCI  
VCCA  
I/O  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
117  
118  
119  
120  
121  
122  
123  
124  
125  
126  
127  
128  
129  
130  
131  
132  
133  
134  
135  
136  
137  
138  
139  
140  
141  
142  
143  
144  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
VCCA  
I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
SDI, I/O  
NC  
SDI, I/O  
I/O  
SDI, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
VCCI  
I/O  
VCCI  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
Revision 12  
2-38  
Package Pin Assignments  
TQ176  
Pin Number  
145  
146  
147  
148  
149  
150  
151  
152  
153  
154  
155  
156  
157  
158  
159  
160  
161  
162  
163  
164  
165  
166  
167  
168  
169  
170  
171  
172  
173  
174  
175  
176  
A42MX09 Function  
A42MX16 Function  
A42MX24 Function  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
PRA, I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
PRA, I/O  
I/O  
PRA, I/O  
I/O  
CLKA, I/O  
VCCA  
GND  
I/O  
CLKA, I/O  
VCCA  
GND  
I/O  
CLKA, I/O  
VCCA  
GND  
I/O  
CLKB, I/O  
I/O  
CLKB, I/O  
I/O  
CLKB, I/O  
I/O  
PRB, I/O  
NC  
PRB, I/O  
I/O  
PRB, I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
NC  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
VCCI  
I/O  
VCCI  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
DCLK, I/O  
I/O  
DCLK, I/O  
I/O  
DCLK, I/O  
I/O  
2-39  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
CQ208  
208207206205204203202201200  
164163162161160159158157  
Pin #1  
Index  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
156  
155  
154  
153  
152  
151  
150  
149  
A42MX36  
208-Pin  
CQFP  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
113  
112  
111  
110  
109  
108  
107  
106  
105  
53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61  
97 98 99 100101102103104  
Revision 12  
2-40  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
CQ208  
CQ208  
CQ208  
Pin Number A42MX36 Function  
Pin Number A42MX36 Function  
Pin Number A42MX36 Function  
1
GND  
VCCA  
MODE  
I/O  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
I/O  
I/O  
73  
74  
I/O  
I/O  
2
3
I/O  
75  
I/O  
4
I/O  
76  
I/O  
5
I/O  
I/O  
77  
I/O  
6
I/O  
I/O  
78  
GND  
VCCA  
VCCI  
I/O  
7
I/O  
I/O  
79  
8
I/O  
I/O  
80  
9
I/O  
I/O  
81  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
I/O  
I/O  
82  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
83  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
84  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
85  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
86  
I/O  
I/O  
87  
I/O  
GND  
GND  
TMS, I/O  
TDI, I/O  
I/O  
88  
I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
89  
I/O  
90  
I/O  
I/O  
91  
QCLKB, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
92  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
93  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
94  
95  
I/O  
VCCI  
I/O  
96  
I/O  
I/O  
97  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
98  
VCCI  
I/O  
GND  
VCCI  
VCCA  
I/O  
I/O  
99  
I/O  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
QCLKA, I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
TDO, I/O  
I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
VCCA  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
Revision 12  
2-41  
Package Pin Assignments  
CQ208  
CQ208  
CQ208  
Pin Number A42MX36 Function  
Pin Number A42MX36 Function  
Pin Number A42MX36 Function  
109  
110  
111  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
117  
118  
119  
120  
121  
122  
123  
124  
125  
126  
127  
128  
129  
130  
131  
132  
133  
134  
135  
136  
137  
138  
139  
140  
141  
142  
143  
144  
I/O  
I/O  
145  
146  
147  
148  
149  
150  
151  
152  
153  
154  
155  
156  
157  
158  
159  
160  
161  
162  
163  
164  
165  
166  
167  
168  
169  
170  
171  
172  
173  
174  
175  
176  
177  
178  
179  
180  
I/O  
I/O  
181  
182  
183  
184  
185  
186  
187  
188  
189  
190  
191  
192  
193  
194  
195  
196  
197  
198  
199  
200  
201  
202  
203  
204  
205  
206  
207  
208  
I/O  
VCCI  
VCCA  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
CLKB, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
PRB, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
QCLKC, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
SDI, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
TCK, I/O  
LP  
VCCI  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCCA  
GND  
VCCI  
VCCA  
I/O  
I/O  
VCCI  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
QCLKD, I/O  
I/O  
DCLK, I/O  
I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
PRA, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
CLKA, I/O  
2-42  
Revision 12  
Package Pin Assignments  
CQ256  
256255254253252251250249248  
200199198197196195194193  
Pin #1  
Index  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
192  
191  
190  
189  
188  
187  
186  
185  
A42MX36  
256-Pin  
CQFP  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
137  
136  
135  
134  
133  
132  
131  
130  
129  
65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73  
121122123124125126127128  
2-43  
Revision 12  
Package Pin Assignments  
CQ256  
CQ256  
CQ256  
Pin Number A42MX36 Function  
Pin Number A42MX36 Function  
Pin Number A42MX36 Function  
1
NC  
GND  
I/O  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
I/O  
I/O  
73  
74  
I/O  
I/O  
2
3
I/O  
75  
I/O  
4
I/O  
I/O  
76  
WD, I/O  
GND  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
5
I/O  
I/O  
77  
6
I/O  
I/O  
78  
7
I/O  
I/O  
79  
8
I/O  
I/O  
80  
QCLKB, I/O  
I/O  
9
I/O  
I/O  
81  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
82  
I/O  
I/O  
83  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
84  
I/O  
I/O  
85  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
86  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
87  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
88  
I/O  
I/O  
89  
I/O  
I/O  
90  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
91  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
92  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
93  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
94  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
95  
VCCI  
VCCA  
GND  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
VCCA  
GND  
GND  
NC  
96  
I/O  
97  
VCCA  
I/O  
98  
99  
I/O  
NC  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
I/O  
VCCA  
VCCI  
GND  
VCCA  
LP  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
SDO, TDO, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
TCK, I/O  
I/O  
GND  
VCCI  
I/O  
2-44  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
CQ256  
CQ256  
CQ256  
Pin Number A42MX36 Function  
Pin Number A42MX36 Function  
Pin Number A42MX36 Function  
109  
110  
111  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
117  
118  
119  
120  
121  
122  
123  
124  
125  
126  
127  
128  
129  
130  
131  
132  
133  
134  
135  
136  
137  
138  
139  
140  
141  
142  
143  
144  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
145  
146  
147  
148  
149  
150  
151  
152  
153  
154  
155  
156  
157  
158  
159  
160  
161  
162  
163  
164  
165  
166  
167  
168  
169  
170  
171  
172  
173  
174  
175  
176  
177  
178  
179  
180  
I/O  
I/O  
181  
182  
183  
184  
185  
186  
187  
188  
189  
190  
191  
192  
193  
194  
195  
196  
197  
198  
199  
200  
201  
202  
203  
204  
205  
206  
207  
208  
209  
210  
211  
212  
213  
214  
215  
216  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
QCLKA, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
MODE  
VCCA  
GND  
NC  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCCI  
I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
NC  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
VCCA  
VCCI  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
DCLK, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
NC  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
VCCI  
I/O  
I/O  
NC  
GND  
I/O  
NC  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCCA  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
QCLKC, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
GND  
Revision 12  
2-45  
Package Pin Assignments  
CQ256  
CQ256  
Pin Number A42MX36 Function  
Pin Number A42MX36 Function  
217  
218  
219  
220  
221  
222  
223  
224  
225  
226  
227  
228  
229  
230  
231  
232  
233  
234  
235  
236  
237  
238  
239  
240  
241  
242  
243  
244  
245  
246  
247  
248  
249  
250  
251  
252  
I/O  
PRB, I/O  
I/O  
253  
254  
255  
256  
SDI, I/O  
I/O  
GND  
NC  
CLKB, I/O  
I/O  
GND  
GND  
VCCA  
VCCI  
I/O  
CLKA, I/O  
I/O  
PRA, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
QCLKD, I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
GND  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCCI  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
2-46  
Revision 12  
Package Pin Assignments  
BG272  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
272-Pin PBGA  
K
L
M
N
P
R
T
U
V
W
Y
2-47  
Revision 12  
Package Pin Assignments  
BG272  
BG272  
BG272  
Pin Number A42MX36 Function  
Pin Number A42MX36 Function  
Pin Number A42MX36 Function  
A1  
A2  
GND  
GND  
I/O  
B17  
B18  
B19  
B20  
C1  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
D13  
D14  
D15  
D16  
D17  
D18  
D19  
D20  
E1  
I/O  
VCCI  
I/O  
A3  
GND  
GND  
I/O  
A4  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
VCCA  
GND  
I/O  
A5  
A6  
I/O  
C2  
MODE  
GND  
I/O  
A7  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
C3  
I/O  
A8  
C4  
I/O  
A9  
C5  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
A10  
A11  
A12  
A13  
A14  
A15  
A16  
A17  
A18  
A19  
A20  
B1  
I/O  
C6  
E2  
I/O  
CLKA  
I/O  
C7  
QCLKC, I/O  
I/O  
E3  
I/O  
C8  
E4  
VCCA  
VCCI  
I/O  
I/O  
C9  
I/O  
E17  
E18  
E19  
E20  
F1  
I/O  
C10  
C11  
C12  
C13  
C14  
C15  
C16  
C17  
C18  
C19  
C20  
D1  
CLKB  
PRA, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
QCLKD, I/O  
I/O  
F2  
I/O  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
DCLK, I/O  
I/O  
F3  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
SDI, I/O  
I/O  
F4  
VCCI  
I/O  
F17  
F18  
F19  
F20  
G1  
B2  
I/O  
B3  
I/O  
I/O  
B4  
I/O  
I/O  
B5  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
B6  
I/O  
D2  
I/O  
G2  
I/O  
B7  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
D3  
I/O  
G3  
I/O  
B8  
D4  
I/O  
G4  
VCCI  
VCCI  
I/O  
B9  
PRB, I/O  
I/O  
D5  
VCCI  
I/O  
G17  
G18  
G19  
G20  
H1  
B10  
B11  
B12  
B13  
B14  
B15  
B16  
D6  
I/O  
D7  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
D8  
VCCA  
WD, I/O  
VCCI  
I/O  
I/O  
D9  
I/O  
I/O  
D10  
D11  
D12  
H2  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
H3  
I/O  
VCCI  
H4  
VCCA  
2-48  
Revision 12  
 
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
BG272  
BG272  
BG272  
Pin Number A42MX36 Function  
Pin Number A42MX36 Function  
Pin Number A42MX36 Function  
H17  
H18  
H19  
H20  
J1  
I/O  
I/O  
L17  
L18  
L19  
L20  
M1  
VCCI  
I/O  
R17  
R18  
R19  
R20  
T1  
VCCI  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
TCK, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
J2  
I/O  
M2  
I/O  
T2  
I/O  
J3  
I/O  
M3  
I/O  
T3  
I/O  
J4  
VCCI  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
VCCA  
I/O  
M4  
VCCI  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
I/O  
T4  
I/O  
J9  
M9  
T17  
T18  
T19  
T20  
U1  
VCCA  
I/O  
J10  
J11  
J12  
J17  
J18  
J19  
J20  
K1  
M10  
M11  
M12  
M17  
M18  
M19  
M20  
N1  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
U2  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
U3  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
U4  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
U5  
VCCI  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
K2  
I/O  
N2  
I/O  
U6  
K3  
I/O  
N3  
I/O  
U7  
K4  
VCCI  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
I/O  
N4  
VCCI  
VCCI  
I/O  
U8  
I/O  
K9  
N17  
N18  
N19  
N20  
P1  
U9  
WD, I/O  
VCCA  
VCCI  
I/O  
K10  
K11  
K12  
K17  
K18  
K19  
K20  
L1  
U10  
U11  
U12  
U13  
U14  
U15  
U16  
U17  
U18  
U19  
U20  
V1  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
VCCA  
VCCA  
LP  
P2  
I/O  
QCLKB, I/O  
I/O  
P3  
I/O  
P4  
VCCA  
I/O  
VCCI  
I/O  
I/O  
P17  
P18  
P19  
P20  
R1  
L2  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
I/O  
L3  
VCCA  
VCCA  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
I/O  
L4  
I/O  
I/O  
L9  
I/O  
I/O  
L10  
L11  
L12  
R2  
I/O  
V2  
I/O  
R3  
I/O  
V3  
GND  
GND  
R4  
VCCI  
V4  
Revision 12  
2-49  
Package Pin Assignments  
BG272  
BG272  
Pin Number A42MX36 Function  
Pin Number A42MX36 Function  
V5  
V6  
I/O  
I/O  
Y1  
Y2  
GND  
GND  
I/O  
V7  
I/O  
Y3  
V8  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
Y4  
TDI, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
V9  
Y5  
V10  
V11  
V12  
V13  
V14  
V15  
V16  
V17  
V18  
V19  
V20  
W1  
I/O  
Y6  
I/O  
Y7  
QCLKA, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
Y8  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
Y9  
I/O  
Y10  
Y11  
Y12  
Y13  
Y14  
Y15  
Y16  
Y17  
Y18  
Y19  
Y20  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
SDO, TDO, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
GND  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
W2  
WD, I/O  
GND  
GND  
W3  
W4  
TMS, I/O  
I/O  
W5  
W6  
I/O  
W7  
I/O  
W8  
WD, I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
W9  
W10  
W11  
W12  
W13  
W14  
W15  
W16  
W17  
W18  
W19  
W20  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
I/O  
WD, I/O  
GND  
GND  
2-50  
Revision 12  
3 – Datasheet Information  
List of Changes  
The following table lists critical changes that were made in the current version of the document.  
Revision  
Changes  
Page  
1-9  
Revision 12  
(March 2014)  
Added information on power-up behavior for A42MX24 and A42MX36 devices to the  
"Power Supply" section (SAR 42096).  
Corrected the inadvertent mistake in the naming of the PL68 pin assignment table  
(SARs 48999, 49793).  
2-4  
1-8  
Revision 11  
(May 2012)  
The FuseLock logo and accompanying text was removed from the "User Security"  
section. This marking is no longer used on Microsemi devices (PCN 0915).  
The "Development Tool Support" section was updated (SAR 38512).  
1-16  
ii  
Revision 10  
(April 2012)  
"Ordering Information" was updated to include lead-free package ordering codes  
(SAR 21968).  
The "User Security" section was revised to clarify that although no existing security  
measures can give an absolute guarantee, Microsemi FPGAs implement the best  
security available in the industry (SAR 34673).  
1-8  
The "Transient Current" section is new (SAR 36930).  
1-9  
2-1  
Package names were revised according to standards established in Package  
Mechanical Drawings (SAR 34774).  
Revision 9  
In Table 1-14 • Absolute Maximum Ratings*, the limits in VI were changed from -0.5 to  
1-21  
1-22  
(v6.1, April 2009) VCCI + 0.5 to -0.5 to VCCA + 0.5.  
In Table 1-16 • Mixed 5.0V/3.3V Electrical Specifications, VOH was changed from 3.7  
to 2.4 for the min in industrial and military. VIH had VCCI and that was changed to  
VCCA.  
v6.0  
(January 2004)  
The "Ease of Integration" section was updated.  
1-i  
1-iii  
The "Temperature Grade Offerings" section is new.  
The "Speed Grade Offerings" section is new.  
1-iii  
The "General Description" section was updated.  
1-1  
The "MultiPlex I/O Modules" section was updated.  
The "User Security" section was updated.  
1-7  
1-8  
Table 1-1 • Voltage Support of MX Devices was updated.  
The "Power Dissipation" section was updated.  
1-9  
1-10  
1-10  
1-10  
1-12  
1-14  
1-14  
1-15  
The "Static Power Component" section was updated.  
The "Equivalent Capacitance" section was updated.  
Figure 1-12 • Silicon Explorer II Setup with 42MX was updated.  
Table 1-4 • Supported BST Public Instructions was updated.  
Figure 1-13 • 42MX IEEE 1149.1 Boundary Scan Circuitry was updated.  
Table 1-5 • Boundary Scan Pin Configuration and Functionality was updated.  
Revision 12  
3-1  
Datasheet Information  
Revision  
Changes  
Page  
1-16  
v6.0  
The "Development Tool Support" section was updated.  
(continued)  
The Table 1-7 • Absolute Maximum Ratings for 42MX Devices* and the Table 1-6 •  
Absolute Maximum Ratings for 40MX Devices* were updated.  
1-17  
The Table 1-9 • 5V TTL Electrical Specifications was updated.  
1-18  
1-20  
1-21  
The Table 1-13 • 3.3V LVTTL Electrical Specifications was updated.  
In the "Mixed 5.0V/3.3V Electrical Specifications" section, Table 1-14 • Absolute  
Maximum Ratings*, Table 1-15  
• Recommended Operating Conditions, and  
Table 1-16 • Mixed 5.0V/3.3V Electrical Specifications were updated.  
Table 1-17 • DC Specification (5.0 V PCI Signaling)1 was updated.  
Table 1-19 • DC Specification (3.3 V PCI Signaling)1 was updated.  
1-23  
1-24  
1-26  
The "Junction Temperature (TJ)" section, "Package Thermal Characteristics" section,  
and the tables were updated.  
Figure 1-16 • 40MX Timing Model* was updated.  
1-27  
1-28  
Figure 1-18 • 42MX Timing Model (Logic Functions Using Quadrant Clocks) was  
updated.  
Figure 1-19 • 42MX Timing Model (SRAM Functions) was updated.  
Figure 1-26 • Output Buffer Latches was updated.  
1-29  
1-32  
1-36  
1-36  
1-83  
2-10  
2-14  
2-20  
Table 1-22 • 42MX Temperature and Voltage Derating Factors is new.  
Table 1-23 • 40MX Temperature and Voltage Derating Factors is new.  
The "Pin Descriptions" section was updated.  
In the "PQ100" table, Pin 64 (42MX09 and 42MX16) has changed to LP.  
In the "PQ160" table, Pin 61 (42MX09, 42MX16, and 42MX64) has changed to LP.  
In the "PQ208" table, the following pins changed:  
Pin 129 (42MX09, 42MX16, and 42MX64) has changed to LP.  
Pin 198 (42MX09) has changed to I/O.  
The n the "PQ240" table, Pin 91 (42MX36) has changed to LP.  
In the "VQ100" table, Pin 62 (42MX09 and 42MX16) has changed to LP.  
In the "TQ176" table, Pin 109 (42MX09 and 42MX16) has changed to LP.  
In the "BG272" table, Pin K20 (42MX36) has changed to LP.  
The "Low Power Mode" section was updated.  
2-27  
2-33  
2-35  
2-48  
1-9  
v5.1  
v5.0  
Footnote 8 in Table 1-9 • 5V TTL Electrical Specifications was updated.  
Footnote 8 in Table 1-13 • 3.3V LVTTL Electrical Specifications was updated.  
1-18  
1-20  
ALL  
Because the changes in this data sheet are extensive and technical in nature, this  
should be viewed as a new document. Please read it as you would a datasheet that is  
published for the first time.  
Note that the “Package Characteristics and Mechanical Drawings” section has been  
eliminated from the datasheet. The mechanical drawings are now contained in a  
separate document, Package Mechanical Drawings, available on the Microsemi SoC  
Products Group website.  
3-2  
Revision 12  
40MX and 42MX FPGA Families  
Datasheet Categories  
In order to provide the latest information to designers, some datasheets are published before data has  
been fully characterized. Datasheets are designated as "Product Brief," "Advanced," "Production," and  
"Datasheet Supplement." The definitions of these categories are as follows:  
Product Brief  
The product brief is a summarized version of a datasheet (advanced or production) containing general  
product information. This brief gives an overview of specific device and family information.  
Advance  
This datasheet version contains initial estimated information based on simulation, other products,  
devices, or speed grades. This information can be used as estimates, but not for production.  
Unmarked (production)  
This datasheet version contains information that is considered to be final.  
Datasheet Supplement  
The datasheet supplement gives specific device information for a derivative family that differs from the  
general family datasheet. The supplement is to be used in conjunction with the datasheet to obtain more  
detailed information and for specifications that do not differ between the two families.  
Revision 12  
3-3  
Microsemi Corporation (NASDAQ: MSCC) offers a comprehensive portfolio of semiconductor  
solutions for: aerospace, defense and security; enterprise and communications; and industrial  
and alternative energy markets. Products include high-performance, high-reliability analog and  
RF devices, mixed signal and RF integrated circuits, customizable SoCs, FPGAs, and  
complete subsystems. Microsemi is headquartered in Aliso Viejo, Calif. Learn more at  
www.microsemi.com.  
Microsemi Corporate Headquarters  
One Enterprise, Aliso Viejo CA 92656 USA  
Within the USA: +1 (949) 380-6100  
Sales: +1 (949) 380-6136  
© 2014 Microsemi Corporation. All rights reserved. Microsemi and the Microsemi logo are trademarks of  
Microsemi Corporation. All other trademarks and service marks are the property of their respective owners.  
Fax: +1 (949) 215-4996  
5172136-12/03.14  

相关型号:

A42MX24-1PLG84YI

Field Programmable Gate Array
MICROSEMI
MICROSEMI

A42MX24-1PQ100

40MX and 42MX FPGA Families
ACTEL

A42MX24-1PQ100A

40MX and 42MX FPGA Families
MICROSEMI

A42MX24-1PQ100B

40MX and 42MX FPGA Families
MICROSEMI

A42MX24-1PQ100ES

40MX and 42MX FPGA Families
ACTEL

A42MX24-1PQ100I

40MX and 42MX FPGA Families
ACTEL

A42MX24-1PQ100I

40MX and 42MX FPGA Families
MICROSEMI

A42MX24-1PQ100M

40MX and 42MX FPGA Families
ACTEL

A42MX24-1PQ100M

40MX and 42MX FPGA Families
MICROSEMI

A42MX24-1PQ160

Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA)
ETC

A42MX24-1PQ160I

Field Programmable Gate Array, 912 CLBs, 36000 Gates, 105.57MHz, 1866-Cell, CMOS, PQFP160, PLASTIC, QFP-160
ACTEL